ENGLISH ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮGC900 ELECTRONICS INC. P/N : MMBB0341147(1.0) H GC900 ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ ENGLISH ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ GC900 User Guide P/N : MMBB0341147(1.
Bluetooth QD ID B015267
Some of the contents in this manual may differ from your phone depending on the software of the phone or your service provider.
Congratulations on your purchase of the advanced and compact GC900 phone by LG, designed to operate with the latest digital mobile communication technology.
Set up 01 Your home screen 02 The basics 03 Get creative 04 Get organised 05 The web 06 Settings 07 Accessories 08
Contents Set up Getting to know your phone ............... 8 Open view .................................................10 Installing the SIM and battery ...........11 Charging your phone............................13 Memory card ............................................14 Menu map .................................................16 Your home screen Touch screen tips .....................................17 Customising the home screen............18 Quick keys .............................................
Get creative Camera .......................................................45 Taking a quick photo .............................45 Once you’ve taken the photo .............46 Getting to know the viewfinder.........47 Using the flash ..........................................48 Adjusting the exposure.........................48 Taking a continuous shot .....................49 Using the advanced settings...............49 Changing the image size ......................52 Choosing a colour effect.................
Contents Sounds ........................................................75 Using a sound ...........................................75 Videos .........................................................75 Sending a video clip ...............................76 Games and Applications ......................76 Playing a game .........................................76 Using the options menu ......................76 Installing a Java game and application .............................................................
Using iSync ................................................92 DivX Converter .........................................93 The web Browser .......................................................94 Accessing the web ..................................94 Adding and accessing bookmarks ....94 Using the RSS reader ..............................95 Accessing a saved page ........................95 Viewing your browser history .............95 Changing web browser settings ........96 Using your phone as a modem ....
Getting to know your phone Power key Turns the phone on/off. Earpiece Proximity Sensor WARNING: Moisture on the proximity sensor may cause it to malfunction. Please wipe any moisture off the sensor surface. Inner camera End key • Press once to return to the home screen. WARNING: Putting a heavy object on the phone or sitting on it can damage its LCD and touch screen functionality. Do not cover the protection film on proximity sensor of LCD. It can be caused the malfunction of sensor.
Memory card socket Multi-tasking key Camera key • Go to the camera menu directly by pressing and holding the key. Charger, Data cable (USB cable) TIP: Before connecting the USB cable, wait until the phone has powered up and has registered on the network. Volume keys • When the screen is idle: key tone volume. • During a call: earpiece volume. • When playing a track: controls volume continuously.
Open view Battery cover SIM card socket Flash light Battery Camera lens TIP! You can turn the flash on by holding down the volume up key when the keypad is locked. Press the volume up key again to turn the flash off. This function is only available when the keypad is locked.
Installing the SIM and battery 1 Remove the battery cover Slide down the battery cover. 3 Install the SIM card Slide the SIM card into the SIM card holder. Make sure the gold contact area on the card is facing downwards. To remove the SIM card, gently pull it outwards. 2 Remove the battery Pull out the battery. WARNING: Do not remove the battery when the phone is switched on, as this may damage the phone.
Installing the SIM and battery 4 Install the battery Insert the top of the battery into the top edge of the battery compartment first. Ensure that the battery contacts align with the phone’s terminals. Press the bottom of the battery down until it clips into place.
Charging your phone 1 Ensure the battery is fully charged before using the phone for the first time. 2 With the arrow facing you as shown in the diagram push the plug on the travel adapter into the socket on the side of the phone until it clicks into place. 3 Connect the other end of the travel adapter to the main socket. Use only the charger included in the box. 4 The moving bars of battery icon will stop after charging is complete.
Memory card Installing a memory card You can expand the available memory space on your phone by using a memory card. NOTE: A memory card is an optional accessory. Slide the memory card into the slot at the top, until it clicks into place. Make sure the gold contact area is facing downwards. WARNING: Slide into the memory card to the slot, otherwise, the card can be damaged.
Formatting the memory card Transferring your contacts Your memory card may already be formatted. If it isn’t, you will need to format it before you can start to use it. NOTE: All files get deleted while formatting. 1 From the home screen select and choose Phone settings from the Settings tab. 2 Scroll and touch Memory info. then scroll and select External memory. 3 Touch Format and then confirm your choice. 4 Enter the password, if one has been set. The card will then be formatted and ready to use.
Menu map Touch in the home screen to open a Top menu. From here you can access further menus by scrolling through the icons: Communication, Multimedia, Utilities and Settings.
Your home screen From this screen you can access menu options, make a call, view the status of your phone and much more. • Whenever your GC900 is not in use, it will return to the lock screen. Touch screen tips The home screen is also a great place to get used to using the touch screen. To select an item, touch the centre of the icon. • Do not press too hard; the touchscreen is sensitive enough to pick up on a light, firm touch. • Use the tip of your finger to touch the option you require.
Your home screen Customising the home screen 1 Shortcut home screen 2 Widget home screen (active) • Get in touch with your GC900 The User Interface is based on four types of Homescreens. To swap between the home screens just wipe quickly over display from left to right or from right to left. • Home screen customisation - For each type of home screen you are able to add and remove objects by pressing & holding your finger on the screen, or if already added touching and holding one of the objects.
1 Touch Edit favourite. 2 Select Music or Gallery menu if you want to add music or image to homescreen. 3 Select the image or music you want to be in each menu. 4 You can see the image or listen to the sound you selected in homescreen. Quick keys The quick keys on your home screen provide easy, one-touch access to the functions you use the most. Touch to bring up the touch dialling pad, which lets you make a call. Enter the number using the normal key pad and touch Voice call.
Your home screen Touch screen The controls on the GC900 touch screen change dynamically, depending on the task you are carrying out. Opening Applications To open any Application, simply touch its icon. 20 LG GC900 | User Guide Scrolling Drag from side to side to scroll. On some screens, such as web pages, you can also scroll up or down.
Zooming In or Out When viewing photos, web pages, emails, or maps, you can zoom in and out. Pinch your fingers together or slide them apart.
Your home screen Viewing the status bar The status bar uses different icons to show conditions such as signal strength, new messages and battery life as well as whether Bluetooth or data connections is active. Below is a table which explains the meaning of icons you’re likely to see in the status bar. Icon Description No Service Icon Description Bluetooth Transfer Bluetooth Visibility Bluetooth Music Downloading Downloading complete. Downloading cancelled.
Icon Description Music playing Icon Description Projector/TV out Email being sent Email receiving MMS MMS sending MMS receiving SMS sending New voicemail New message Message sending has failed New email Push message Flight mode Normal Outdoor Silent - Customised ringtones 1-10 External memory Battery status 23
Your home screen Using the Multi - tasking function Press the multitasking hard key for two seconds to open the Multitasking menu. From here you can view some applications that are running and access them with one touch. Multitasking Contacts Browser Messaging Games & Apps Email Music FM radio Organiser Memo End all TIP! Press the multitasking hard key shortly to enter cube box to customise the home screen.
Calls TIP! Press the power key to lock the touchscreen to prevent calls being made by mistake. Making a call or a video call 1 Touch to open the keypad. 2 Type in the number on the keypad. To delete a digit, press the clear key. 3 Touch the Voice call to make the call. 4 To end the call, touch the key. Calling your contacts 1 From the home screen touch to open your Contacts. 2 Scroll through the contact list or enter the first letter(s) of the contact you want to call by touching .
Calls In-call options Hold - Touch to put a call on hold. Mute - Touch to turn the microphone off so the person you are talking to cannot hear you. Speaker - Touch to turn the speaker phone on. Options - Choose from a list of further in-call options, including creating new memo and going to messages, so you can check your messages and add contacts during a call. You can also end the call from here by touching End call. - Touch to open a numerical keypad for typing numbers, e.g.
Adjusting call volume To adjust the volume during a call, use the up and down button on the right side of the phone. Speed dialling You can assign a frequently-called contact to a speed dial number. 1 From the home screen touch to open your Contacts. 2 Touch and select Speed dials. 3 Your voicemail is already set to speed dial 1. You cannot change this. Touch any other number to assign it to a speed dial contact. 4 Your contacts list will open.
Calls Turning off DTMF DTMF lets you use numerical commands to navigate within automated calls. DTMF default is set to on. To turn it off during a call (to make and a note of a number) touch select Disable DTMF. Viewing your call logs From the home screen, touch , then touch Recent history in the Communication tab. Choose from the following: All history - View a complete list of all dialled, received and missed calls, voice calls only, video calls and messages.
Using call divert Using call barring and choose Call 1 Touch settings in the Settings tab. 2 Touch Call divert and select Voice calls and/or Video calls. 3 Choose whether to divert all call, when the line is busy, when there is no answer or when you cannot be contacted. 4 Touch Activate to activate. 5 Enter the number to divert to. NOTE: Diverting calls will incur charges. Please contact your network operator for details. 1 Touch and choose Call settings in the Settings tab.
Calls TIP! Select Fixed dial number to turn on and compile a list of numbers which can be called from your phone. You’ll need your PIN2 code, which is available from your operator. Only numbers within the fixed dial list can be called from your phone. Changing the common call setting 1 Touch and choose Call settings in the Settings tab. 2 Touch Common settings. This lets you change the following settings: Call reject - Slide the switch left for ON.
Changing your video call settings 1 From the home screen, touch and scroll to Call settings in the Settings tab. 2 Touch Video call settings and select the settings for your video calls. Decide whether to use still image, then select ON/OFF to switch on the mirror to see yourself on screen when making a video call.
Contacts Searching for a contact Adding a new contact There are two ways to search for a contact: From the home screen 1 From the home screen, touch to open your Contacts. Touch and enter the contact name using the key pad. 2 Touch Video call or Voice call or the Voice call to place the call. 1 From the home screen, touch and then touch then select New contact button. 2 Choose whether to save the contact to Handset or USIM. 3 If you want to add a picture to the new contact, touch Add picture.
7 Assign the contact to one or more groups, choosing between No group, Family, Friends, Colleagues, School or VIP. 8 You can also add a Ringtone, Homepage, Home address, Company name, Job title, Company address, Birthday, Anniversary and a Memo. to save the contact. 9 Touch TIP! You can create customised groups for your contacts. See Creating a group. Creating a group 1 From the home screen, touch and then touch Contacts in the Communication tab.
Contacts Changing your contact settings You can adapt your contact settings to suit your own preferences. 1 Touch Contacts on the Communication tab, select and scroll to Contact settings. 2 From here, you can adjust the following settings: Display name - Choose whether to display the first or last name of a contact first. Copy all - Copy your contacts from your SIM to your handset, or vice versa. You can do this one contact at a time, or all at once.
Viewing information 1 Touch Contacts from the Communication tab select and touch Information. 2 From here you can view Service dial numbers, Own numbers, Memory info. (memory space remaining) and My business card. TIP! To add your own business card, select My business card and enter your details as you would for any contact. Touch Save icon to finish.
Messaging Messaging Your GC900 combines SMS, MMS into one intuitive, easy-to-use menu. There are two ways of entering the messaging centre: 1 From the home screen, touch , then scroll to Messaging or on the Communication tab. Sending a message 1 Touch then Write message to open a blank message. 2 Touch To to enter the recipient’s number, or open your contacts or favourites. You can add multiple contacts. When you are finished, touch the message box below to start composing the message text.
Entering text T9 predictive Touch to turn on T9 predictive texting. Touch to change the writing language. Tap to change between the number, symbol and text keypads. In T9 mode, you will see . T9 mode uses a built-in dictionary to recognise your words based on the key sequences you touch. Simply touch the number key associated with the letter you want to enter, and the dictionary will predict the word you want to use. For example, press 8, 3, 5, 3, 7, 4, 6, 6 and 3 to write ‘telephone’.
Messaging Setting up your email You can keep in touch on the move by using your GC900 to send emails. It’s quick and simple to set up a POP3 or IMAP4 email account. 1 Touch from the home screen, and scroll to Email on the Communication tab. 2 Touch Write email. If the email account is not set up, start the email set up wizard. TIP! If an email account is already set up, the wizard is not activated automatically.
Save sent mail into - Select where to save sent emails (for IMAP4 mailboxes). For POP3 mailboxes, sent mails are always saved to the handset. Download option - Choose how you want to download emails. Choose between Header only or All including attachment for POP3 and header only, header + body, or all for IMAP4. Access point - Choose your Internet access point. Advanced settings - Choose whether to use the advanced settings.
Messaging Changing your email settings You can change your email settings based on your own preferences. 1 Touch from the home screen, then scroll to Messages settings on the Settings tab. 2 Select Email. 3 You can alter the following settings: Email accounts - Manage your email accounts. Allow reply email - Choose whether to allow read confirmation messages to be sent. Request reply email - Choose whether to request read confirmation messages.
Message folders You will recognise the folder structure in your GC900, and it is fairly self-explanatory. NOTE: E-mail account box and Message box are arranged respectively. Inbox - All messages you receive are stored in your inbox. From here you can view and delete them, among other functions. Outbox - This is a temporary storage folder while messages are being sent. Sent - Messages you sent are stored in this folder.
Messaging Using emoticons Liven up your messages using emoticons. There are some commonly used emoticons already on your phone. 1 When writing a new message, you can enter Emoticons from Insert in the options menu. 2 You can add a new emoticon by touching New emoticon. Changing your text message settings Your GC900 message settings are pre-defined, so you can send messages immediately. These settings can be changed based on your preferences.
Changing your multimedia message settings Your GC900 message settings are pre-defined, so you can send messages immediately. These settings can be changed based on your preferences. In Setting tap select Message settings and Multimedia message. You can make changes to the following: Retrieval mode - Select Home network or Roaming network. If you then select Manual, you will only receive notifications about MMS messages. You can then decide whether or not to download them in full.
Messaging Changing your other settings Scroll to Message settings on the Settings tab then: Voicemail - Touch New profile or to add a new Voicemail service. Contact your network operator for more information about the service they provide. Service message - Choose whether to receive or block service messages. You can also set message security levels by creating trusted and untrusted sender lists. Info. service - Choose your reception status, language and other settings.
Camera Taking a quick photo 1 Press and hold down the camera key on the right side of the phone. 2 Holding the phone horizontally, point the lens towards the subject you want to take a picture of. 3 Press the capture button lightly and a focus box will appear in the centre of the viewfinder screen. 4 Position the phone so you can see the photo subject in the focus box. 5 When the focus box turns green, the camera has focused on your subject. 6 Press the capture button and hold it down.
Camera Once you’ve taken the photo Your captured photo will appear on the screen. The image name is shown with four icons on the righthand side. Send Use Rename Edit Touch to send the photo as a Message, Email, Bluetooth or Blogger. Send NOTE: Additional cost may occur when MMS are downloaded when roaming. Use Touch to use the image as homescreen, Lock screen,contact ,Start-up/Shut down and Outgoing/ Incoming call image. 46 LG GC900 | User Guide Rename Touch to edit the name of the selected picture.
Getting to know the viewfinder Back - Touch here to return to the menu map. Switch mode - Change the mode between camera and video camera. Gallery - Touch this icon to view the gallery. Settings - Touch this icon to open the settings menu. Macro - Switch this on to take close up shots. Flash status - Set flash light mode to automatic, Red-eye reduction,on or off. Exposure - See Adjusting the Exposure on next page. Scene mode - Set the camera to adjust to the environment.
Camera Using the flash The default flash setting is auto, but there are other options. 1 Select from the left side of the viewfinder to enter the flash sub-menu. 2 There are four flash options: Auto - Your camera will assess the light available for a good picture and use the flash as necessary. Red-eye reduction - The camera will flash twice in order to remove red eye. Always on - The camera will always flash. Always off - The camera will never flash. This is useful if you want to save battery power.
Taking a continuous shot 1 From the viewfinder, touch to open all advanced settings options and select Continuous shot in shot mode menu. 2 Position the subject in the viewfinder and press the capture button as if taking a normal photo. 3 The camera will take shots in quick succession. Using the advanced settings From the viewfinder, touch to open all advanced settings options. You can change the camera setting by scrolling the wheel. After selecting the option, touch the OK button.
Camera Shot mode - Choose from the options: Normal - This is default shot type, the photo will be taken in normal way. Continuous shot - This enables you to take six shots automatically in very quick succession. Smile shot - This shot type is great for taking a photo of people. Focus on the subject and press then the photo will be taken automatically when it smile. Beauty shot - This enables you to take a photo of person’s face clearly and brightly. Especially useful when you are close up.
Memory in use - Choose whether to save your photos to the Handset memory or the External memory. Preview style - Choose the preview type whether you want to see the image as full image or full screen. Hide icons - Choose the camera settings icons to be hidden manually or automatically. TIP! When you exit the camera all settings will return to their defaults, except image size and image quality. Any non-default settings will need to be reset, such as colour tone. Check these before you take your next photo.
Camera Changing the image size Choosing a colour effect The more pixels, the larger the file, which means the files take up more memory space. If you want to store more pictures on your phone, you can change the resolution to make the files smaller. 1 Using the viewfinder, touch in the top left corner. 2 Select Colour effect from the Preview menu. 3 There are four colour tone options: Sepia, Mono, Negative, and Emboss.
Using the inner camera Your LG GC900 has an inner 640x480 camera for both video calls and taking photos. 1 To switch to the inner camera then select Swap touch camera- Secondary from the Preview menu. 2 After a few seconds you’ll see yourself in the viewfinder. To capture the image, press the side button as normal. 3 After you’ve taken the photo you’ll be offered all the same options as for an image taken with the main camera. 4 To return to the main camera and then select Main touch from the Preview menu.
Video camera Shooting a quick video 1 Press and hold down the camera key on the right side of the phone. 2 Then, touch . Or, you can enter this menu directly by touching Video camera. 3 The video camera’s viewfinder will appear on the screen. 4 Holding the phone horizontally, point the lens towards the subject of the video. 5 Press the capture button once to start recording. 6 Rec will appear at the bottom of the viewfinder with a timer showing the length of the video.
After shooting a video A still image representing your video will appear on the screen. The name of the video will be shown on the bottom of the screen, along with four icons on the right-hand side. Play TIP! The great editing software on your LG GC900 is compatible with all video types except 720X480 (D1). Don‘t record in this format if you plan to edit your video. Touch to return to the previous menu. Send Use Rename Play Rename Touch to edit the name of the selected video. Touch to play the video.
Video camera Getting to know the viewfinder Back - Touch here to return to the home screen. Start recording Gallery - Touch this icon to view the gallery. Settings - Touch this icon to open the settings menu. See Using the advanced settings on next page for details. Recording speed Flash status - Set or turn off the flash. Exposure - See Adjusting the Exposure on next page. Scene mode - Choose from Auto or Night. TIP! You can close all shortcut options to give a clearer viewfinder screen.
Adjusting the exposure The exposure defines the difference between light and dark areas in an image. A low contrast image will appear foggy, whereas a high contrast image will appear much sharper. 1 Touch . 2 Slide the exposure indicator for along the bar, towards a lower exposure and fuzzier for a higher image, or towards contrast and sharper image. Using the advanced settings Using the viewfinder, touch Settings to open all the advanced settings options.
Video camera Video quality - Choose between Super fine, Fine and Normal. The finer the quality, the sharper the video will be. The file size will increase as a result, meaning you’ll be able to store fewer videos in the phone’s memory. Duration - Set a duration limit for your video. Choose between Normal and MMS to limit the maximum size to send as an MMS. TIP! If you choose MMS duration, choosing a lower image quality will enable you to shoot a longer video.
Changing the video image size The more pixels, the larger the file size, which means the files take up more memory space. If you want to store more videos on your phone, you can change the video resolution to make the files smaller. 1 Using the viewfinder, touch in the top left corner. 2 Select Video size from the Preview menu. 3 Select a pixel value from the four options: 720X480 (D1) - The highest quality, widescreen option. 640x480 (VGA) - Standard sized VGA.
Video camera Choosing a colour tone Using the inner video camera 1 Using the viewfinder, touch in the top left corner. 2 Select Colour effect from the Preview menu. 3 There are five colour tone options, Off, Sepia, Mono, Negative or Emboss. 4 Touch the colour tone you want to use. Your LG GC900 has an inner 320x240 camera for both video calls and recording videos. 1 To switch to the inner camera, then select Swap touch camera then Secondary from the Preview menu.
TIP! You can still alter the image size, colour effect, white balance and quality by touching Settings in the same way as when using the main camera. Watching your saved videos 1 In the viewfinder, touch . 2 Your gallery will appear on the screen. 3 Touch a video once to bring it to the front of the gallery. It start to play by touching play icon.
Your photos and videos Viewing your photos and videos Using zoom when viewing a video or photo 1 Touch on the camera preview screen. 2 Your gallery will appear on the screen. 3 Touch the video or photo to open it fully. When viewing photos or videos, you can zoom in and out by pinching your fingers together or spreading them apart.
Setting a photo as wallpaper Editing your photos 1 Touch the photo you want to set as wallpaper to open it. 2 Touch the screen to open the options menu. 3 Touch Use as . 4 The screen will switch to portrait mode. You can zoom in and out the image. You can do lots of great things to your photos to change them, add to them or liven them up. 1 Open the photo you want to edit and touch Edit to show the options. 2 Touch the icons to alter your photo: Crop your photo.
Your photos and videos Decorate your photo with stamps. Choose from the different stamps and touch your photo where you want to place them. Erase the editing you have done to the picture. You can choose the size of eraser you use. Filter Touch to apply the effect options to a photo. Adjust ment This helps to adjust a picture taken using automatic colour, brightness etc. Save Touch to return to the gallery. Save Save the changes you made to the photos.
Adding text to a photo Adding an effect to a photo 1 From the editing screen, touch . 2 Select Text to add unframed text or choose one of the speech bubble shapes. 3 Enter your text using the keypad and touch Save. 4 Move the text by touching it and sliding it to where you want it. 1 From the editing screen, touch Filter . 2 You can apply any of the various options to the photo 3 To undo an effect simply touch Undo .
Your photos and videos Adding a colour accent to a photo 1 From the editing screen, touch Image . 2 Choose Colour Accent. 3 Select part of the photo. A traced line will appear around everything in that area which is the same or a similar colour, for example, a person’s hair or jumper. 4 Alter the intensity of the accenting by touching Intensity and touch ‘+’ or ‘-’ button. 5 Touch OK. 6 All colour will be removed from the photo, apart from the in the section marked for colour accenting.
Editing your videos The video editing features are available for MPEG4 types except 720x480 (D1) resolution. Don‘t record in these formats if you plan to edit your video. Save Undo Trim Preview Trimming the length of the video Merging two videos 1 Open the video you want to edit, option key. touch 2 Select Edit and choose Trim/ Multi trim. 3 Touch and set the new start and end points using Trim . 4 Touch Preview to confirm you are satisfied with the new cut.
Your photos and videos Merging a photo with a video Movie editor > Merge Save Undo File name 1 Duration : 00:00:40 File name 4 Duration : 00:00:40 Total : 00:01:20 Effect Preview 6 Press Save then New file to save the new merged video. Replace the existing file or save as a new file. 7 Repeat these steps to merge more videos. 68 LG GC900 | User Guide 1 Open the video you want to edit, option key. touch 2 Select Edit and choose Image merge. 3 The My images folder will open.
Adding text to a video 1 Open the video you want to edit, option key. touch 2 Select Edit and select Text overlay. 3 Touch and pause playback for setting the start point for text appearance. 4 Touch Start and choose the text styles. Enter your text using the keypad and select OK. 5 Touch the area of the screen you want the text to appear and touch OK. Save Undo Show text Preview 6 Touch Save. Replace the existing file or save as a new file. 7 Repeat these steps to add more text.
Your photos and videos 6 Touch OK and then press End when the photo overlay shall be stopped. 7 Touch Save. Replace the existing file or save as a new file. 8 Repeat these steps to add more photos. 5 If the audio is shorter than the video, choose whether to play it Once or to Repeat it. 6 Replace the existing file or save as a new file. Adding a soundtrack to your video 1 Open the video you want to edit, option key. touch 2 Select Edit and choose Live dubbing.
Changing the video speed Creating a movie 1 Open the video you want to edit, option key. touch 2 Select Edit and choose Time scaling. 3 Select one of the options. This can vary depending on the frame rate. 4 Replace the original file or save as a new file. 1 Touch then select Movie maker from Multimedia tab. Adding a dimming effect 1 Open the video you want to edit, option key. touch Edit 2 Select and choose Dimming Effect. 3 Your video will now fade in at the start and fade out at the end.
Multimedia You can store multimedia files in your phone’s memory so you have easy access to all your pictures, sounds, videos and games. You can also save your files to a memory card. Using a memory card allows you to free up space in your phone’s memory. To access the Multimedia menu, select My stuff from touch Multimedia tab. You can open a list of the folders that store all your multimedia files. TIP! To delete any files in then Delete.
Using an image You can choose images to use as wallpapers and screensavers, or even to identify a caller. then select My stuff 1 Touch from Multimedia tab. 2 Touch My images. 3 Select an image and touch . 4 Touch Use as and choose between: Homescreens - Set an image as a homescreen. Lock screen - Set a wallpaper for the key lock screen. Contacts - Allocate an image to a person in your contacts list, so the picture is displayed when they call you.
Multimedia Moving or copying an image Geo-tagging An image can be moved or copied between the phone memory and the memory card. You may want to do this to clear some space in one of the memories, or to safeguard your images against loss. 1 Touch then select My stuff from Multimedia tab. 2 Touch My images. 3 Touch . 4 Select Move or Copy. Turn on the camera and enjoy the capabilities of your phone’s locationbased services. Take pictures wherever you are and tag them with the location.
Sounds Videos The My sounds folder contains Downloaded sounds, Default sounds and Voice recordings. From here you can manage or send sounds or set them as ringtones. The My videos folder shows a list of videos you have downloaded or recorded on your phone. Watching a video 1 Touch then select My stuff on the Multimedia tab. 2 Touch My videos. 3 Select a video to play. Using a sound 1 Touch then select My stuff from Multimedia tab. 2 Touch My sounds. 3 Select Default sounds or Voice recordings.
Multimedia Sending a video clip Playing a game 1 Select a video and touch . 2 Touch Send and choose between Message, Email, Bluetooth and Youtube. 3 If you choose Message or Email, your video clip will be attached to the message, which you can write and send as normal. If you choose Bluetooth, your phone will search for a device to send the video to. 1 Touch then select Games & Apps on the Multimedia tab. 2 Touch Games or Applications menu. 3 Touch Launch button to launch a game or an application.
Installing a Java game and application 1 Touch then select My stuff on the Multimedia tab. 2 If you insert new memory card, touch External Memory menu. 3 Select the file(*.jad or *.jar) you want to install and touch Install. Viewing an SWF/ SVG file 1 Touch then select My stuff from Multimedia tab. 2 Touch Flash contents. 3 Select the file you want to view. Documents This is possible with your Excel, PowerPoint, Word, Text and pdf files.
Multimedia Transferring a file to your phone Bluetooth is probably the easiest way of transferring a file from your computer to your phone. You can also use LG PC Suite via your sync cable. To transfer files (e.g. music) using Bluetooth: 1 Make sure your phone and computer have Bluetooth switched on and are within range of each other 2 Use your computer to send the file via Bluetooth. 3 When the file is sent, accept it on your phone by touching Yes.
Music Your LG GC900 has a built-in music player that lets you play all your favourite tracks. To access the music then select Music player, touch from Multimedia Tab. From here, you can access a number of folders: All tracks - Contains all the songs such as MP3, WMA, WAV, and AAC format types you have on your phone. Favorites - Contains the songs you have saved as favourites. Artists - Browse your music collection by artist. Albums - Browse your music collection by album.
Multimedia Playing a song Creating a playlist 1 Touch then select Music from the Multimedia tab. 2 Touch All tracks. 3 Select the song you want to play . then touch 4 Touch to pause the song. to skip to the next 5 Touch song. to go back to the 6 Touch previous song. 7 Touch to return to the Music menu. You can create your own playlists by choosing a selection of songs from the All tracks folder. 1 Touch then select Music from the Multimedia tab. 2 Touch the option icon.
Deleting a playlist 1 Touch then select Music from the Multimedia tab. 2 Touch Playlist. option icon. 3 Touch the 4 Touch Remove or Remove all to delete all of the playlists. Using the radio Your LG GC900 has an built-in FM radio feature so you can tune into your favourite stations and listen on the move. NOTE: You will need to attach your headphones to listen to the radio. Insert them into the headphone socket.
Multimedia 3 Touch Auto scan then Yes. The stations found will be allocated to channel numbers in your phone by selecting Set, Skip and Stop. NOTE: You can also manually tune to a station by using the wheel displayed next to the radio frequency. Resetting channels then select FM radio 1 Touch from Multimedia tab. . 2 Touch 3 Touch Reset Channel to reset the current channel or touch Reset all to reset all of the channels. If you reset all of the channels, each channel will return to the starting 87.
Organiser Adding an event to your calendar 1 From the home screen select then scroll to Organiser on the Utilities tab. 2 Select the date to which you want to add an event. then New schedule. 3 Touch 4 Touch Category then choose between Appointment, Anniversary or Birthday. Check the date and enter the time you want your event to begin. 5 For appointments and anniversaries, you can enter the time and date the event finishes in the lower time and date boxes.
Organiser Adding an item to your To Do list 1 From the home screen select then scroll to Organiser on the Utilities tab. select New task and 2 Select touch Note. 3 Set the date for the task, add notes, then select its priority level: High, Medium or Low. . 4 Save the task by selecting TIP! You can back up and synchronise your calendar with your computer(PC Sync).
Setting your alarm Adding a memo 1 From the home screen select then scroll to Alarms on the Utilities tab. 2 If you want add a new alarm, touch New alarm. If you want to set the alarm to sound again within one hour, touch Quick alarm. 3 Set the time you would like the alarm to sound. 4 Choose whether you want the alarm to repeat, set the repeat and type. The icons indicate the weekday you select. 5 Select Sound/ Vibration to select the type of alarm you want.
Organiser Voice recorder Sending the voice recording Use your voice recorder to record voice memos or other audio files. 1 Once you have finished recording, you can send the audio clip by touching Send. 2 Choose Message, Email or Bluetooth. If you choose Message or Email, the recording will be added to the message which you can write and send it as normal. If you choose Bluetooth, your phone will search for a device to send the voice recording to. Recording a sound or voice 1 Touch .
Using your calculator 1 From the home screen select , then scroll to Calculator on the Utilities tab. 2 Touch the number keys to enter numbers. 3 For simple calculations, touch the function you require (+, –, x or ÷), followed by =. 4 For more complex calculations, and choose between touch sin, cos, tan, deg, log, etc.. Converting a unit 1 From the home screen select , then scroll to Tools on the Utilities tab. 2 Select Unit converter.
Organiser Adding a city to your world clock 1 From the home screen, select and scroll to World clock in the Utilities tab. 2 Touch Add city. Choose continent and select the city from and touch the Map. Or touch List. Start typing the name of the city you require, and it will be displayed on the screen. 3 Touch the city to select it. This will add it to your World time list.
PC Suite You can synchronise your PC with your phone. This will ensure all your important details and dates match, and also act as a back up to help your mind at ease. TIP! To do this, you will need to install the PC Suite application provided on the CD-ROM or available as a download from the website. (From www. lgmobile.
PC Suite Caution! If LG PC Suite is not activated automatically in your PC, please check your CD-ROM setting on PC. 3 Your phone and PC are now connected. Backing up and restoring your phone‘s information 1 Connect your phone to your PC as outlined above. 2 Click on the Backup icon, and select Backup or Restore. 3 Choose whether to back up Contents Data and/or Phonebook/Schedule/Todo/ Memo Data. Select the location you want to back up the information to, or restore it from. Click OK.
4 Click on File and select Save. You can now select where you want to save your contacts to. NOTE: To back up contacts saved to your SIM card, click on the SIM card folder on the left side of the PC screen. Right click on one of your contacts and choose Select all, then Copy or Move to phone memory. Right-click your contacts and select Copy to contact. Now click on the Handset folder on the left side of the screen and all your numbers will be displayed.
PC Suite 5 The PC will prompt you to launch your preferred music management software. 6 Select Windows Media Player. 7 Go to the Sync Tab, then drag and drop the music you wish to transfer to your handset into the Sync List pane. 8 Click on Start Sync button. This starts the transfer process. WARNING Do not disconnect your phone during the transfer. NOTE: Music Sync is only available for music contents.
NOTE: When using Bluetooth, you have to select iSync on in option menu. TIP! To install the iSync menu in Macintosh PC, please visit the website www.lgmobile.com and download the plug-in for iSync. DivX Converter Install the DivX converter, which is supplied on the same CD as the PC Sync software. DivX will convert media files on your PC to a format that lets you upload them and view them on your phone. Once installed select DivX from the Program Files on your PC, then DivX converter followed by Converter.
The web Browser Browser gives you a fast, full-colour world of games, music, news, sport, entertainment and loads more, straight to your mobile phone. Wherever you are and whatever you’re into. Accessing the web 1 From the home screen select then scroll to Browser on the Communication tab. 2 To go straight to the browser home page, select Home. Alternatively, select Enter address and type in the URL, followed by OK. NOTE: You will incur extra cost by connecting to these services and downloading content.
Using the RSS reader Accessing a saved page RSS (Really Simple Syndication) is a family of web feed formats used to publish frequently updated content, such as blog entries, news headlines or podcasts. An RSS document, called a feed, web feed or channel, contains either a summary of content from an associated website or its full text. RSS makes it possible for people to keep up-to-date with their favourite web sites in an automated way that is easier than checking manually.
The web Changing web browser settings 1 From the home screen select then scroll to Connectivity on the Settings tab. 2 Select Browser settings. 3 You can edit the Profile, Appearance settings, Cache/ Cookies, Security or Reset settings. 4 You can simply set these on or off by touching the switch icon. Using your phone as a modem Your GC900 can be used as a modem for your PC, giving you email and internet access even when you don’t have any wired connection.
Using Bluetooth: 1 Ensure Bluetooth is switched On and Visible for both your PC and GC900. 2 Pair your PC and GC900 so that a passcode is required to connect them. 3 Use the Connection wizard on your LG PC Suite to create an active Bluetooth connection. 4 Click Inernetkit on your PC. Then click New. 5 Click Modem. 6 Choose Standard Modem over Bluetooth link and click OK. It will now appear on the screen. 7 Click Connect and your PC will connect via your GC900.
Settings This folder lets you adapt your settings to personalise your GC900. Changing your screen settings 1 From the home screen, select then scroll to Screen settings on the Settings tab. 2 You can choose the option menu from: Wallpaper - Choose an image for homescreens, locking, switching the phone on or off, or making or receiving a call. NOTE: The setting will be reset if you select Reset menu. Homescreens - Widget/ Contact/ Multimedia/ Shortcut Lock screen - Choose the clock type on the lock screen.
3 You can then change all sounds and alert options available in the list, including your Voice/Video ringtone, Volume, Message alerts and others. Changing your phone settings Use the freedom of adapting the GC900 to your own preferences. 1 From the home screen, select then scroll to Phone settings on the Settings tab. 2 Select a menu from the list below: Date & Time - Adjust your date and time settings or choose to auto update the time when travelling or for daylight saving.
Settings Changing your touch settings Changing your connectivity settings From the home screen select then scroll to Phone settings > Touch settings on Settings tab. Touch vibration - Change the vibration On/Off. Vibration type - Vibration 1/2/3 Vibration volume - Controls the strength of vibration. Touch sound - Change the tone when touching the screen. Sound - Sound 1/2/3 Volume - Controls the volume of tone.
GPS GPS technology uses information from earth-orbiting satellites to find locations. A receiver estimates the distance to GPS satellites based on the time it takes for signals to reach them, then uses that information to identify its location. This can take up to several minutes to find your location. Stand Alone GPS Receiver – The technology that communicates to the GPS Satellites to determine current location.
Settings There are two types of GPS Navigation Software: - Maps stored on Handset/ Memory Card where no Data connection is required. A third party may provide this solution. - Maps stored on Server where all mapping information is streamed to the handset over a data connection (charges may apply). This has the benefit of the maps being regularly updated and can contain other useful information such as petrol prices, parking and weather.
Using memory manager Your GC900 has three available memories: the phone itself, the SIM Card and an external memory card (which you may need to purchase separately). You can use memory manager to determine how each memory is used and see how much space is available. From the home screen select then scroll to Phone settings on the Settings tab. Select Memory info. Handset common memory 1/2 View the memory available on your GC900 for MMS, Email, Java applications and others.
Settings Using flight mode Turn flight mode on by selecting then Settings. Touch Profiles and select Flight mode. Flight mode prevents you making calls, connecting to the Internet, sending messages. Sending and receiving files using Bluetooth Bluetooth is a great way to send and receive files as it uses no wires and connection is quick and easy. You can also connect to a Bluetooth headset to make and receive calls.
3 You will see where the file has been saved and choose to View the file or Use as. Files will usually be saved to the appropriate folder in My stuff. Changing your Bluetooth settings 1 From the home screen select then scroll to Bluetooth on the Settings tab. 2 Touch . Make your changes to: My device information - Enter a name for your GC900. My device visibility - Choose to be Visible, Hidden or Visible for 1 min. Remote SIM mode on - Activate the remote SIM mode. iSync on - Choose to activate on iSync.
Settings 4 Choose the device you want to pair with and enter a passcode, then touch OK. 5 Your phone will then connect to the other device, on which you will need to enter the same passcode. 6 Your passcode-protected Bluetooth connection is now ready. Using a Bluetooth headset 1 Check that your Bluetooth is On. 2 Follow the instructions that came with your headset to put it in pairing mode and pair your devices. 3 The headset will be automatically switched to Headset profile.
Wi-Fi Wireless Manager allows you to manage Internet connections per Wi-Fi (Wireless LAN) on your device. It allows the phone to connect to local wireless networks, or access the Internet wirelessly. Wi-Fi is faster and has a greater range than Bluetooth wireless technology and can be used for fast emailing and Internet browsing. NOTE: The GC900 supports WEP, WPA-PSK/2 encryption, and not EAP, WPS encryption.
Wi-Fi 2. Wi-Fi network profile support 1 Wi-Fi profile support (how to connect to a frequently-used AP or Hidden AP) 1) If the AP does not appear in the search list, you can connect to it by saving it as a profile. 2) Saving the frequently-used AP as a profile makes it easier to enter the Security key when connecting to an AP with that Security type. 3) If the AP does not support DHCP, you can connect to the AP using a static IP address.
3 How to save the Wi-Fi profile 1) Select Saved networks from the Options menu, then select New network and enter values into each field. 2) It is possible to select and save the AP search list by selecting Wi-Fi On and then Refresh (Searching AP). 3) After connecting to an AP with this Security type, the profile will be saved automatically. 3. How to obtain MACaddress For setting up a connection in some wireless networks with MAC filter you may need to enter the MAC address of your GC900 into the router.
Phone Software update LG Mobile Phone Software upgrade in web site For more information and using this function, Please visit LGmobile. com site path: http://www.lgmobile.com - select country – Products menu - Manual & software menu This Feature allows you to upgrade your software to the latest version and conveniently on the internet without needing to visit our service center.
Accessories There are a variety of accessories available for your mobile phone, which may be sold separately. You can select these options according to your personal communication requirements. Consult your local dealer for availability. (Items described below may be optional.) Charger Battery Stereo headset Data cable and CD Connect and synchronise your GC900 and PC. User Guide Learn more about your GC900. GC900 User Guide NOTE: • Always use genuine LG accessories.
Network service Technical data The wireless phone described in this guide is approved for use on E-GSM 900, DCS 1800, GSM 850, PCS 1900 and W-CDMA networks. A number of features included in this guide are called Network Services. These are special services that you arrange through your wireless service provider. Before you can take advantage of any of these Network Services, you must subscribe to them through your service provider and obtain instructions for their use from your service provider.
E-GSM 900 / DCS 1800 / GSM 850 / PCS 1900 Quad Band and WCDMA Terminal Equipment GC900 R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC EN 301 489-1 V1.6.1 / EN 301 489-7 V1.3.1 / EN 301 489-17 V1.2.1 / EN 301 489-19 V1.2.1 / EN 301 489-24 V1.3.1 EN 60950-1: 2001 EN 50360 / EN62209-1: 2006 EN 301 511 V9.0.2 / EN 301 908-1 V3.2.1 / EN 301 908-2 V3.2.1 EN 300 328 V1.7.
Guidelines for safe and efficient use Please read these simple guidelines. Not following these guidelines may be dangerous or illegal. Exposure to radio frequency energy Radio wave exposure and Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) information This mobile phone model GC900 has been designed to comply with applicable safety requirements for exposure to radio waves.
Product care and maintenance WARNING Only use batteries, chargers and accessories approved for use with this particular phone model. The use of any other types may invalidate any approval or warranty applying to the phone, and may be dangerous. • Do not disassemble this unit. Take it to a qualified service technician when repair work is required. • Keep away from electrical appliances such as TVs, radios, and personal computers. • The unit should be kept away from heat sources such as radiators or cookers.
Guidelines for safe and efficient use • Do not subject this unit to excessive smoke or dust. • Do not keep the phone next to credit cards or transport tickets; it can affect the information on the magnetic strips. • Do not tap the screen with a sharp object as it may damage the phone. • Do not expose the phone to liquid or moisture. • Use the accessories like earphones cautiously. Do not touch the antenna unnecessarily.
• Use a hands-free kit, if available. • Pull off the road and park before making or answering a call if driving conditions so require. • RF energy may affect some electronic systems in your vehicle such as car stereos and safety equipment. • When your vehicle is equipped with an air bag, do not obstruct with installed or portable wireless equipment. It can cause the air bag to fail or cause serious injury due to improper performance.
Guidelines for safe and efficient use Blasting area Children Do not use the phone where blasting is in progress. Observe restrictions, and follow any regulations or rules. Keep the phone in a safe place out of the reach of small children. It includes small parts which may cause a choking hazard if detached. Potentially explosive atmospheres Emergency calls • Do not use the phone at a refueling point. • Do not use near fuel or chemicals.
• Do not disassemble or short-circuit the battery pack. • Keep the metal contacts of the battery pack clean. • Replace the battery when it no longer provides acceptable performance. The battery pack maybe recharged hundreds of times until it needs replacing. • Recharge the battery if it has not been used for a long time to maximize usability. • Do not expose the battery charger to direct sunlight or use it in high humidity, such as in the bathroom.
Trouble Shooting This chapter lists some problems you might encounter while using your phone. Some problems require you to call your service provider, but most are easy for you to correct yourself. Message Possible causes Possible Solutions SIM error There is no SIM card in the phone or it is inserted incorrectly. Make sure the SIM card is correctly inserted. No network connection Signal weak Outside GSM network area Move towards a window or into an open area.
Message Possible causes Possible Solutions Battery totally empty Charge battery. Temperature out of range Make sure the ambient temperature is right, wait for a while, and then charge again. Contact problem Check the power supply and connection to the phone. Check the battery contacts and clean them if necessary. No mains voltage Plug in to a different socket or check the voltage. Charger defective If the charger does not warm up, replace it. Wrong charger Only use original LG accessories.
ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﻋﻠﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﯽ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﮐﺎﻣﻼﹰ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﺩﻣﺎ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ. ﺍﻃﻤﯿﻨﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻣﺎی ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﺍﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﺳﺖ ،ﻣﺪﺗﯽ ﺻﺒﺮ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﻗﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﯿﺪ. ﻣﺸﮑﻞ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺐ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻭ ﻧﯿﺰ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﺳﻄﻮﺡ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻤﯿﺰ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﻓﺎﻗﺪ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺷﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺮﯾﺰ ﺩﯾﮕﺮی ﺑﺰﻧﯿﺪ ﻭ ﯾﺎ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
ﻋﯿﺐ ﯾﺎﺑﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺸﮑﻼﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺣﯿﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻪ ﺷﻮﯾﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﻢ .ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺸﮑﻼﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻠﺰﻡ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﺍﺗﯽ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ،ﺍﻣﺎ ﺑﺴﯿﺎﺭی ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﺸﮑﻼﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻓﻊ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﻋﻠﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﯽ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺧﻄﺎی ﺳﻴﻢ ﺳﻴﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻧﯿﺴﺖ ﯾﺎ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺟﺎﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ. ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﯾﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺳﻴﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺻﺤﯿﺢ ﺟﺎﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ.
• ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭﻫﺎی LGﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ .ﺷﺎﺭژﺭﻫﺎی LGﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺍی ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ﺑﺮﺳﺎﻧﻨﺪ. • ﺗﻌﻮﯾﺾ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻧﺎﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﭘﯽ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ. • ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﯾﺎ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﮐﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. • ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎی ﻣﺴﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﺭﺍ ﻃﺒﻖ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﮐﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺳﺎﺯﻧﺪﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺑﯿﺎﻧﺪﺍﺯﯾﺪ .ﻟﻄﻔﺎ ﹰ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯﯾﺎﻓﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﯿﺪ .ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺯﺑﺎﻟﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺧﺎﻧﮕﯽ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻧﯿﺎﻧﺪﺍﺯﯾﺪ.
ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﯾﻤﻦ ﻭ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ ﻧﺎﺣﯿﻪ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﯿﺎﺕ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﯾﺖ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻋﺎﯾﺖ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻠﯿﻪ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﯿﻦ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺮﺭﺍﺕ ﭘﯿﺮﻭی ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ • ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻮﺍﭘﯿﻤﺎ ﺭﻭی ﺯﻣﯿﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻛﺴﺐ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﭘﺮﻭﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻧﮑﻨﯿﺪ. ﮐﻮﺩﮐﺎﻥ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﮑﺎﻧﯽ ﺍﻣﻦ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﮐﻮﺩﮐﺎﻥ ﺧﺮﺩﺳﺎﻝ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﺪﻫﯿﺪ .
• ﻫﻤﻪ ﺣﻮﺍﺱ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻧﻨﺪﮔﯽ ﺑﺪﻫﯿﺪ. ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺁﻥ ﻗﺪﺭ ﺯﯾﺎﺩ ﻧﮑﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻨﻮﺍﯾﯽ • ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ،ﺍﺯ ﯾﮏ ﮐﯿﺖ ﻫﻨﺪﺯﻓﺮی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺁﺳﯿﺐ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﺪ. ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. • ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺷﺮﺍﯾﻂ ﺭﺍﻧﻨﺪﮔﯽ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﺪ ،ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﯾﺎ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﯾﮏ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺍﻣﻨﯽ ﭘﺎﺭک ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. • ﺍﻧﺮژی ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﺭﺍﺩﯾﻮﯾﯽ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺮ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺳﯿﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭﻧﯿﮏ ﻭﺳﯿﻠﻪ ﻧﻘﻠﯿﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﯾﻮﻫﺎی ﺧﻮﺩﺭﻭ ﻭ ﺗﺠﻬﯿﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﯾﻤﻨﯽ ﺁﻥ ﺗﺄﺛﯿﺮ ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﺩ.
ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﯾﻤﻦ ﻭ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ • ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻬﻮﯾﻪ ﮐﺎﻓﯽ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ. • ﺍﺯ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺩﻭﺩ ﯾﺎ ﮔﺮﺩ ﻭ ﻏﺒﺎﺭ ﻏﻠﯿﻆ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. • ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻣﺠﺎﻭﺭﺕ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭی ﯾﺎ ﺑﻠﯿﻂ ﻫﺎی ﺣﻤﻞ ﻭ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﯿﺪ .ﺍﯾﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﻭی ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺭﻫﺎی ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﯿﺴﯽ ﺗﺄﺛﯿﺮ ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﺩ. • ﺑﺎ ﻭﺳﺎﯾﻞ ﻧﻮک ﺗﯿﺰ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﻧﺰﻧﯿﺪ ،ﺍﯾﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺁﺳﯿﺐ ﻣﯽ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﺪ. • ﺍﺯ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺎﯾﻌﺎﺕ ﯾﺎ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺒﺖ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎ ،ﺷﺎﺭژﺭﻫﺎ ﻭ ﲡﻬﯿﺰﺍﺕ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺗﻮﺻﯿﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ .ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺎﯾﺮ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﲡﻬﯿﺰﺍﺕ ،ﺑﻪ ﻏﯿﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺗﻮﺻﯿﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ، ﳑﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺑﺎﻃﻞ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺖ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺁﻓﺮﯾﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ. • ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﮐﯿﺪﺍ ﹰ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻧﯿﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻌﻤﯿﺮ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ، ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﻪ ﺗﮑﻨﺴﯿﻦ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. • ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺳﺎﯾﻞ ﺑﺮﻗﯽ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺗﻠﻮﯾﺰﯾﻮﻥ، ﺭﺍﺩﯾﻮ ،ﻭ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ.
ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﯾﻤﻦ ﻭ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ ﻟﻄﻔﺎ ﹰ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺯﯾﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻗﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ .ﻋﺪﻡ ﺭﻋﺎﯾﺖ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺿﺮﺭﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﺩﺭ ﭘﯽ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﯾﺎ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﻧﻘﺾ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﯿﻦ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ. ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻧﺮژی ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﺭﺍﺩﯾﻮﯾﯽ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻣﻮﺍﺝ ﺭﺍﺩﯾﻮﯾﯽ ﻭ ﺿﺮﯾﺐ ﺟﺬﺏ ﻭﯾﮋﻩ )(SAR ﺍﯾﻦ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﻣﺪﻝ GC900ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺍی ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﻘﺮﺭﺍﺕ ﻭ ﺷﺮﺍﯾﻂ ﻻﺯﻡ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻣﻮﺍﺝ ﺭﺍﺩﯾﻮﯾﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ .
E-GSM 900 / DCS 1800 / GSM 850 / PCS 1900 Quad Band and WCDMA Terminal Equipment GC900 R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC EN 301 489-1 V1.6.1 / EN 301 489-7 V1.3.1 / EN 301 489-17 V1.2.1 / EN 301 489-19 V1.2.1 / EN 301 489-24 V1.3.1 EN 60950-1: 2001 EN 50360 / EN62209-1: 2006 EN 301 511 V9.0.2 / EN 301 908-1 V3.2.1 / EN 301 908-2 V3.2.1 EN 300 328 V1.7.
ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﯽ ﺳﯿﻤﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻫﺎی E-GSM 900، DCS 1800، GSM 850، PCS 1900ﻭ WCDMAﺗﺄﯾﯿﺪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ. ﻋﻤﻮﻣﯽ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﯿﺖ ﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺻﻄﻼﺣﺎ ﹰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻣﯽ ﻧﺎﻣﻨﺪ .ﺍﯾﻨﻬﺎ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﯾﮋﻩ ﺍی ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﯾﻖ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﯽ ﺳﯿﻢ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻬﺮﻩ ﻣﻨﺪ ﺷﻮﯾﺪ .
ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺧﺮﯾﺪﺍﺭی ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺎ GC900ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ. ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺳﯽ ﺩی ﺟﻬﺖ ﻫﻤﮕﺎﻡ ﺳﺎﺯی ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻭﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ. ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺪﺳﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﯾﻮ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮی ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ GC900 ﮐﺴﺐ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. GC900ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ: • ﻫﻤﯿﺸﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺍﺻﻞ LGﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. • ﻋﺪﻡ ﺭﻋﺎﯾﺖ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺍﺻﻞ ﻣﻬﻢ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺖ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺳﺎﻗﻂ ﮐﻨﺪ. • ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺣﯽ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ.
ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯﺁﻭﺭی ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺍﺭﺗﻘﺎی ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ LGﺩﺭ ﻭﺏ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ، ﻟﻄﻔﺎ ﹰ ﺍﺯ LGmobile.com siteﺑﺎﺯﺩﯾﺪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﺳﯿﺮ- http://www.lgmobile.com : ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺸﻮﺭ – ﻣﻨﻮی ﭘﺎﺩﮐﺴﺖ -ﻣﻨﻮی ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﻭ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻭﯾﮋﮔﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺪﯾﺪﺗﺮﯾﻦ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﺍﺭﺗﻘﺎ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺣﺘﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﯾﻦ ﮐﻪ ﻧﯿﺎﺯی ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺗﯽ ﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ.
(3ﺍﮔﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﯿﺎﺑﯽ ﺍﺯ DHCPﭘﺸﺘﯿﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ،ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ IP ﺍﯾﺴﺘﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﯿﺎﺑﯽ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﻮﯾﺪ. 2ﺷﺮﺡ ﻫﺮ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ .Wi-Fi (1ﻧﺎﻡ ﺷﺒﮑﻪSSID (ID) : (2ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻣﻨﯿﺖ :ﭘﺸﺘﯿﺒﺎﻧﯽ .WEP، WPA (3ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺍﻣﻨﯿﺘﯽ :ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺍﻣﻨﯿﺘﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ. (4ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ :IP/DNSﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﯾﻦ ﮐﻪ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﯿﺎﺑﯽ ﺍﺯ DHCPﭘﺸﺘﯿﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﯾﺎ ﺧﯿﺮ ،ﺍﯾﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﯾﺎ ﺍﯾﺴﺘﺎ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ.
Wi-Fi ﻣﺪﯾﺮ ﺑﯽ ﺳﯿﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺍﯾﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ Wi-Fiﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺪﯾﺮﯾﺖ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ .ﺑﺎ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﯿﺖ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺑﯽ ﺳﯿﻢ ﻣﺤﻠﯽ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﯾﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺑﯽ ﺳﯿﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺍﯾﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﯿﺪ Wi- Fi .ﺳﺮﯾﻊ ﺗﺮ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺩﺍﻣﻨﻪ ی ﻭﺳﯿﻊ ﺗﺮی ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻦ ﺁﻭﺭی ﺑﯽ ﺳﯿﻢ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺍﺳﺖ. ﺗﻮﺟﻪ GC900 :ﺍﺯ ﺭﻣﺰ WEP، WPAﻭ ﻧﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻣﺰ EAP، WPSﭘﺸﺘﯿﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ .ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ Wi-Fiﯾﺎ ﻣﺪﯾﺮ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ،ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻣﻨﯿﺖ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ،ﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ی ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﯿﺪ .
ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻫﺪﺳﺖ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ 1ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ. 2ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﻫﺪﺳﺖ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻫﺪﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺿﻌﯿﺖ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﺳﺎﺯی ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻭ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻭ ﻫﺪﺳﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﺳﺎﺯی ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. 3ﻫﺪﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﻭﺿﻌﯿﺖ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ. 4ﻫﻤﯿﺸﻪ ﺳﺆﺍﻝ ﺷﻮﺩ ﯾﺎ ﭘﺬﯾﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺳﺆﺍﻝ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ.
ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﺳﺎﺯی ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ 1ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ، ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ،ﺑﻪ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺑﺮﻭﯾﺪ. ﺑﺎ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﺳﺎﺯی ﮔﻮﺷﯽ GC900ﺑﺎ ﯾﮏ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ،ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﯾﮏ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺭﻣﺰ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ .ﺍﯾﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻪ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﯾﺶ ﺍﻣﻨﯿﺖ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﺳﺎﺯی ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ. 2 ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ. ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮﺍﺗﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺧﺼﻮﺹ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺯﯾﺮ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ: ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﻦ -ﻧﺎﻣﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﻮﺷﯽ GC900ﺧﻮﺩ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
3ﺍﮔﺮ ﻗﺒﻼﹰ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﯾﺪ، GC900ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ .ﺩﺭ ﻏﯿﺮ ﺍﯾﻨﺼﻮﺭﺕ GC900،ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺩﯾﮕﺮی ﮐﻪ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺁﻥ ﻫﺎ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ. 4ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. 5ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ. ﻧﮑﺘﻪ! ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻃﻤﯿﻨﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺍﯾﻨﮑﻪ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ،ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻭﺿﻌﯿﺖ ﻧﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﯽ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ - 1/2ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺮﻭﺍﺯ ﺩﺭ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ GC900ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ،MMSﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ، ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی Javaﻭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﭼﻨﺪﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی ﮔﻮﺷﯽ -ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﯾﺎﺕ ﭼﻨﺪﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﺟﺮﯾﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ،ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ،ﺗﺼﺎﻭﯾﺮ ﻣﻮﺳﯿﻘﯽ ،ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎ ،ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﻭ ﻓﻠﺶ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ -ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ،SMSﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﯿﻦ ،ﺗﻘﻮﯾﻢ، ﻟﯿﺴﺖ ﮐﺎﺭﻫﺎ ،ﯾﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ،ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ،ﺗﺎﺭﯾﺨﭽﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ،ﻣﺤﻞ ﯾﺎﺏ ﻫﺎ ،ﻭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ - USBﮔﻮﺷﯽ GC900ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ LG PC Suiteﻫﻤﮕﺎﻡ ﺳﺎﺯی ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻭ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ ﮐﭙﯽ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﯿﺪ .ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﮕﺎﻡ ﺳﺎﺯی ،ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ 81ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺟﺮﯾﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ -ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺟﺮﯾﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻭﯾﺮﺍﯾﺶ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ - Javaﻟﯿﺴﺖ ﮔﻮﺍﻫﯽ ﻫﺎی ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﯾﺎ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ Javaﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ. ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﺗﻠﻮﯾﺰﯾﻮﻥ -ﯾﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎی PALﯾﺎ NTSCﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ GC900ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﯾﺰﯾﻮﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺪﯾﺮ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ، ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ -ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ ﺑﺮﻭﯾﺪ. ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ، ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ،ﺑﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﻭﯾﺪ. ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ -ﻧﻮﻉ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ. ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ -ﮔﻮﺷﯽ GC900ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺑﺮﮔﺰﯾﺪﻩ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ. ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ -ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ. ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﺍﯾﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ -ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺍﯾﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
3ﺍﮐﻨﻮﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﻪ ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎ ﻭ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻟﯿﺴﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﺯﻧﮓ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ/ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮی ﻭ ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ، ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭﻫﺎی ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﻭ ﺑﺴﯿﺎﺭی ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ. ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺁﺯﺍﺩی ﻋﻤﻠﯽ ﮐﻪ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ GC900ﺑﺮﺍی ﺷﻤﺎ ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻭﻟﻮﯾﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺷﻤﺎ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ،ﻟﺬﺕ ﺑﺒﺮﯾﺪ. ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ 1ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ، ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ،ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﺮﻭﯾﺪ. 2ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻟﯿﺴﺖ ﺯﯾﺮ ،ﻣﻨﻮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ GC900ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻠﯿﻘﻪ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ. ﺗﻮﺟﻪ :ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ،ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ 34ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ 1ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ، ﺩﺭ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ،ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺑﺮﻭﯾﺪ. 2ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺑﯿﻦ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺯﯾﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ: ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﺯﻣﯿﻨﻪ -ﯾﮏ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻗﻔﻞ ﺷﺪﻥ، ﺭﻭﺷﻦ/ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ،ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭی ﯾﺎ ﺩﺭﯾﺎﻓﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ: 1ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻫﻢ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ ﻭ ﻫﻢ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﻮﺷﯽ GC900ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺭﻭﯾﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ. 2ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ ﻭ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ GC900ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺍی ﺑﻪ ﯾﮑﺪﯾﮕﺮ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭی ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺪ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﻧﯿﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ. 3ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ Connection wizard )ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺟﺎﺩﻭﯾﯽ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ( ﺩﺭ LG PC Suite ﯾﮏ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
ﻭﺏ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﻭﺭﮔﺮ ﻭﺏ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ :USB ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ 1ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ، ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﺭ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ،ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﯿﺪ. 1ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ LG PC Suiteﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ. 2ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﻭﺭﮔﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. 3ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﻫﺎ ،ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﻇﺎﻫﺮی ،ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﭘﻨﻬﺎﻥ ،ﮐﻮﮐﯽ ﻫﺎ ،ﺍﻣﻨﯿﺖ ﯾﺎ ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﯾﺮﺍﯾﺶ ﺷﻮﺩ. 4ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺣﺘﯽ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ،ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﯾﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ RSSﺧﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ) RSSﺳﻨﺪﯾﮑﺎی ﺳﺎﺩﻩ( ﺍﺯ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﻫﺎی ﺳﺮﻭﯾﺲ ﺧﺒﺮی ﻭﺏ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺸﺎﺭ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﯾﺎﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﻫﺎی ﻭﺑﻼگ ،ﺳﺮﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺧﺒﺎﺭ ﯾﺎ ﭘﺎﺩﮐﺴﺖ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ .ﯾﮏ ﺳﻨﺪ RSSﮐﻪ ﺳﺮﻭﯾﺲ ﺧﺒﺮی ،ﺳﺮﻭﯾﺲ ﺧﺒﺮی ﻭﺏ ﯾﺎ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻧﺎﻣﯿﺪﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ،ﺣﺎﻭی ﺧﻼﺻﻪ ﺍی ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﯾﺎﺕ ﻭﺏ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﯾﺎ ﻣﺘﻦ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﺁﻥ ﻫﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ RSS .ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺏ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻋﻼﻗﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﯿﺪ ،ﺍﯾﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ ﺗﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ.
ﻭﺏ ﻣﺮﻭﺭﮔﺮ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻞ ﯾﺎﺏ ﻫﺎ ﻣﺮﻭﺭﮔﺮ ﺩﻧﯿﺎﯾﯽ ﺭﻧﮕﺎﺭﻧﮓ ﻭ ﺳﺮﯾﻊ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺯی ﻫﺎ، ﻣﻮﺳﯿﻘﯽ ،ﺍﺧﺒﺎﺭ ،ﻭﺭﺯﺵ ،ﺳﺮﮔﺮﻣﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﯿﻤﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﯿﺮی ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ .ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﮐﺠﺎ ﮐﻪ ﻫﺴﺘﯿﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ ﮐﺎﺭی ﮐﻪ ﻣﺸﻐﻮﻟﯿﺪ. ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺳﺮﯾﻊ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺏ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ،ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﺤﻞ ﯾﺎﺏ ﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ 1ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ،ﻣﺮﻭﺭﮔﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﯿﺪ.
ﻧﮑﺘﻪ! ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﻨﻮی iSyncﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ ،Macintoshﻟﻄﻔﺎ ﹰ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺏ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ www. lgmobile.comﺑﺎﺯﺩﯾﺪ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﭘﻼﮔﯿﻦ iSyncﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﯿﺮی ﳕﺎﯾﯿﺪ. ﻣﺒﺪﻝ DivX ﻣﺒﺪﻝ DivXﺭﻭی ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺳﯽ ﺩی ﮐﻪ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﻫﻤﮕﺎﻡ ﺳﺎﺯی ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ،ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ .ﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﺒﺪﻝ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺼﺐ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ DivX .ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺘﯽ ﺗﺒﺪﯾﻞ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺁﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﯿﺮی ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
ﻫﻤﮕﺎﻡ ﺳﺎﺯی ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﻮﺳﯿﻘﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ Windows Media Player ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ 1ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ، ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﺭ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ،ﺑﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﻭﯾﺪ. ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ،ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻧﮑﻨﯿﺪ. 2ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ USBﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻫﻤﮕﺎﻡ ﺳﺎﺯی ﻣﻮﺳﯿﻘﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﯿﺪ. ﺗﻮﺟﻪ :ﻫﻤﮕﺎﻡ ﺳﺎﺯی ﻣﻮﺳﯿﻘﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﺍی ﻣﻮﺳﯿﻘﯽ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ.
ﻫﻤﮕﺎﻡ ﺳﺎﺯی ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﯿﻦ ﻫﻤﮕﺎﻡ ﺳﺎﺯی ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﻫﺎ 1ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. 1ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. 2ﺭﻭی ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ) Contentsﻣﺤﺘﻮﯾﺎﺕ( ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. 2ﺭﻭی ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ) Messagesﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﻫﺎ( ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. 3ﺑﻪ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﯿﺐ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ ﮐﻠﯿﻪ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﯾﺎﺕ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﻭی ﺳﻴﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻭ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ. 3ﮐﻠﯿﻪ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﻫﺎی ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻭ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ.
ﻫﻤﮕﺎﻡ ﺳﺎﺯی ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ 3ﺍﮐﻨﻮﻥ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻭ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ. ﭘﺸﺘﯿﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺯﯾﺎﺑﯽ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ 1ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺤﻮی ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. 2ﺭﻭی ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ) Backupﭘﺸﺘﯿﺒﺎﻧﯽ( ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﻭ ﯾﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ) Backupﭘﺸﺘﯿﺒﺎﻧﯽ( ﯾﺎ ) Restoreﺑﺎﺯﯾﺎﺑﯽ( ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. 3ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺤﺘﻮﺍ ﻭ/ ﯾﺎ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ/ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ/ﮐﺎﺭﻫﺎ/ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﯾﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﭘﺸﺘﯿﺒﺎﻥ ﺗﻬﯿﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ .
ﻫﻤﮕﺎﻡ ﺳﺎﺯی ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﮕﺎﻡ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ .ﺑﺎ ﺍﯾﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﮐﻠﯿﻪ ﺟﺰﺋﯿﺎﺕ ﻣﻬﻢ ﻭ ﺗﺎﺭﯾﺦ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﯿﻦ ﮐﺎﺭﻫﺎی ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﻤﮕﺎﻡ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﻫﺎ ﭘﺸﺘﯿﺒﺎﻥ ﺗﻬﯿﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺁﺳﻮﺩﻩ ﺧﺎﻃﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﯿﺪ. ﻧﮑﺘﻪ! ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﯾﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ،ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ PC Suiteﺭﺍ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ CD-ROMﺍﺳﺖ ،ﻧﺼﺐ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ .ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ http://update. lgmobile.comﺑﺎﺭﮔﯿﺮی ﮐﻨﯿﺪ) .ﺍﺯ www.lgmobile.
ﺳﺎﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ 1ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ، ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ،ﺑﻪ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﻭﯾﺪ. 5ﺑﺮﺍی ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺳﻨﺞ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺁﻥ ،ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ،ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. 2ﻣﺒﺪﻝ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﯾﮏ ﺷﻬﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺟﻬﺎﻧﯽ ﺗﺒﺪﯾﻞ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ 3ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﭘﻮﻝ ،ﺳﻄﺢ، ﻃﻮﻝ ،ﻭﺯﻥ ،ﺩﻣﺎ ،ﺣﺠﻢ ﯾﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﺒﺪﯾﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. 4ﺳﭙﺲ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭی ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﯿﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺗﺒﺪﯾﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﯿﺪ.
ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺿﺒﻂ ﯾﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﯾﺎ ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎی ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. 1ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﺪﺍ ،ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ. ﺿﺒﻂ ﯾﮏ ﺻﺪﺍ ﯾﺎ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ 1ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ، ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ،ﺑﻪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺑﺮﻭﯾﺪ. 2ﺑﺮﺍی ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ. 3ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﺎﯾﺎﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ. ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﻮﺕ 2ﺍﺯ ﺑﯿﻦ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ،ﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ ﯾﺎ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ .
ﺳﺎﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺯﻧﮓ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ 1ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ، ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ،ﺑﻪ ﺯﻧﮓ ﻫﺎی ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﺮﻭﯾﺪ. 2ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﯿﺪ ﯾﮏ ﺯﻧﮓ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ،ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭﻫﺎ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ. ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﯿﺪ ﺯﻧﮓ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﯾﮏ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺯﻧﮓ ﺑﺰﻧﺪ ،ﺯﻧﮓ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﻓﻮﺭی ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ. 3ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺯﻧﮓ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ. ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ 4ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ ﯾﺎ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ ﺯﻧﮓ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ،ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﯿﺪ.
ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﯾﮏ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻟﯿﺴﺖ ﮐﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺎﺭﯾﺦ ﯾﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ 1ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ، ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ،ﺑﻪ ﺳﺎﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﻭﯾﺪ. ﺗﺎﺭﯾﺦ ﯾﺎﺏ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺑﺴﯿﺎﺭ ﻣﻔﯿﺪی ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﺗﺎﺭﯾﺦ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﮐﻤﮏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ .ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ، ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ 2ﮐﺎﺭ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﯾﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ. 3ﺗﺎﺭﯾﺨﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﺎﺭ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ، ﯾﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺘﯽ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺍﻭﻟﻮﯾﺖ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﯿﺪ :ﺯﯾﺎﺩ ،ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﯾﺎ ﮐﻢ. 4ﮐﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
ﺳﺎﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﯾﮏ ﺭﻭﯾﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻘﻮﯾﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ 1ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ، ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ،ﺑﻪ ﺳﺎﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﻭﯾﺪ. 2ﺗﺎﺭﯾﺨﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﯿﺪ ﺭﻭﯾﺪﺍﺩی ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. 3 ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ. 4ﻣﻘﻮﻟﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻼﻗﺎﺕ ،ﺳﺎﻟﮕﺮﺩ ﯾﺎ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺗﻮﻟﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﺗﺎﺭﯾﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺭﻭﯾﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. 5ﺑﺮﺍی ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻟﮕﺮﺩﻫﺎ ،ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺗﺎﺭﯾﺦ ﭘﺎﯾﺎﻥ ﺭﻭﯾﺪﺍﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺗﺎﺭﯾﺦ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ: ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ 1ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ ﭼﻨﺪﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی ،ﺭﺍﺩﯾﻮ FMﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ 1ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ ﭼﻨﺪﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی ،ﺭﺍﺩﯾﻮ FMﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. 2 ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ. 3ﺍﺳﮑﻦ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﻠﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ. ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﯾﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﯾﺎﻓﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ،ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ،ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻦ ﯾﺎ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﯿﺎﺭ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﯽ ﮔﯿﺮﺩ .ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺍﯾﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻌﺪی ،ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی ﺣﺬﻑ ﻟﯿﺴﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ 1ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ ﭼﻨﺪﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی ،ﻣﻮﺳﯿﻘﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. 2ﻟﯿﺴﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ. 3ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻟﯿﺴﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺬﻑ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. 4ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ. 5ﺣﺬﻑ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺬﻑ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺗﺮﺍﻧﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻟﯿﺴﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ،ﻟﯿﺴﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﻫﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺭﻭﯾﺪ، ﭘﺎک ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ.
4ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺳﯿﻘﯽ < ﻫﻤﻪ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﻫﺎ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ. ﭘﺨﺶ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ 1ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ ﭼﻨﺪﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی ،ﻣﻮﺳﯿﻘﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. 2ﻫﻤﻪ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ. 3ﺗﺮﺍﻧﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﺨﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ. 4ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ، ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ. 5ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ. 6ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ. 7ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ، ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ. ﻧﮑﺘﻪ! ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﯿﻦ ﮔﻮﺵ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ.
ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی 4ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﯾﺮ ﻣﻦ ،ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎی ﻣﻦ، ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻦ ،ﺍﺳﻨﺎﺩ ﯾﺎ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ. ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ،ﺻﺪﺍ ،ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ،ﺑﺎﺯی ﯾﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﻨﺪ. ﺍﯾﻦ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺍﺳﻨﺎﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ .ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ،ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ. ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ،ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ.
ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺑﺎﺯی ﻣﺘﺤﺮک ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﺑﺎﺯی ﻣﺘﺤﺮک ﺣﺎﻭی ﺑﺎﺯی ﻫﺎی ﻓﻠﺶ ﺍﺯ ﭘﯿﺶ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﯿﺮی ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺴﮕﺮ ﻣﺘﺤﺮک ﺗﻌﺒﯿﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ. 1ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﭼﻨﺪﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی ،ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﻣﺤﺘﻮﯾﺎﺕ ﻓﻠﺶ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﯾﺎﺕ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻓﻠﺶ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﮐﻠﯿﻪ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎی SWFﭘﯿﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﯿﺮی ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ. ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ SWF/SVG 1ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﭼﻨﺪﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی ،ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. 2ﻣﺤﺘﻮﯾﺎﺕ ﻓﻠﺶ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ.
ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﮐﻠﯿﭗ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮی 1ﻓﯿﻠﻤﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮی ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ. 2ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺑﯿﻦ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﭘﯿﺎﻡ، ﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ ﯾﺎ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. 3ﺍﮔﺮ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﯾﺎ ﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ،ﮐﻠﯿﭗ ﻭﯾﺪﺋﻮﯾﯽ ﺑﻪ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﺿﻤﯿﻤﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ .ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ،ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮی ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﯽ ﻣﯽ ﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﺪ. ﺩﺭ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺎﺯی ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ،ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ: • ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ :ﯾﮏ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﺯی ﻫﺎ ﯾﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎی ﻣﻦ ﺣﺎﻭی ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎی ﺑﺎﺭﮔﯿﺮی ﺷﺪﻩ ،ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎی ﭘﯿﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﻭ ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎی ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ .ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻨﺠﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺳﺎﺯﻣﺎﻧﺪﻫﯽ ﻭ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻭ ﯾﺎ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﺯﻧﮓ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﯿﺪ. ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ی ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻦ ﺣﺎﻭی ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺎﺭﮔﯿﺮی ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭﻧﯿﺰ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﯾﺪ. ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺻﺪﺍ 1ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﭼﻨﺪﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی ،ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. 2ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎی ﻣﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ. 3ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎی ﭘﯿﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﯾﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﯾﺎ ﮐﭙﯽ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﯿﻦ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻭ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ ﯾﺎ ﮐﭙﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ .ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺍﯾﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﻀﺎی ﯾﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻫﺎ ﯾﺎ ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺒﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﯾﺮ ﻭ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﯿﺮی ﺍﺯ ﮔﻢ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺁﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ. 1ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﭼﻨﺪﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی ،ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. 2ﺗﺼﺎﻭﯾﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ. 3 ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ. 4ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﯾﺎ ﮐﭙﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﯾﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﺯﻣﯿﻨﻪ ،ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺐ ،ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﯾﺎ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﯾﺎ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﯾﺎ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. 1ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﭼﻨﺪﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی ،ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. 2ﺗﺼﺎﻭﯾﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ. 3ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ. 4ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﯾﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺯﯾﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ: ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ -ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﯾﮏ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﻫﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﯾﺮ، ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎ ،ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺯی ﻫﺎی ﺧﻮﺩ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺳﺮﯾﻊ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﯿﺪ .ﻫﻤﭽﻨﯿﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﯾﮏ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﻣﺰﯾﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﻓﻀﺎی ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﯾﺪ. ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﭼﻨﺪﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی، ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﭼﻨﺪﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ .ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﻟﯿﺴﺘﯽ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺎﻭی ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎی ﭼﻨﺪﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ 1ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ ﭼﻨﺪﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی ،ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﺳﺎﺯ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. 2ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ،ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ. 3ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﺳﺒﮏ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺯﯾﺮ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﯾﮏ ﺳﺒﮏ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. 4ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻣﺜﻼﹰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ. 5ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻧﺘﺎﯾﺞ ،ﭘﯿﺶ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ. 6ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﯿﺐ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺗﺮﺗﯿﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ.
ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﻫﺎی ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ 1ﻓﯿﻠﻤﯽ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﯿﺪ ﻭﯾﺮﺍﯾﺶ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ. ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ 1ﻓﯿﻠﻤﯽ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﯿﺪ ﻭﯾﺮﺍﯾﺶ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ. ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ 2ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺁﺭﺍﯾﺶ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. 2ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻣﻘﯿﺎﺱ ﺩﻫﯽ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. 3ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎی ﻣﻦ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ .ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. 3ﯾﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻪ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﻋﮑﺲ 1ﻓﯿﻠﻤﯽ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﯿﺪ ﻭﯾﺮﺍﯾﺶ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ. ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ 2ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻫﻤﭙﻮﺷﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. 1ﻓﯿﻠﻤﯽ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﯿﺪ ﻭﯾﺮﺍﯾﺶ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ. ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ 2ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻫﻤﭙﻮﺷﺎﻧﯽ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. 3ﻣﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺗﺄﯾﯿﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. 3ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﯾﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ .ﻋﮑﺲ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻫﻤﭙﻮﺷﺎﻧﯽ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﻫﺎی ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺩﻏﺎﻡ ﺩﻭ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﺍﺩﻏﺎﻡ ﯾﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﺎ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ 1ﻓﯿﻠﻤﯽ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﯿﺪ ﻭﯾﺮﺍﯾﺶ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ. ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ 1ﻓﯿﻠﻤﯽ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﯿﺪ ﻭﯾﺮﺍﯾﺶ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ. ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ 2ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺍﺩﻏﺎﻡ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. 2ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺍﺩﻏﺎﻡ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. 3ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻦ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ .ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺩﻏﺎﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. 3ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﯾﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ .
ﺗﻌﻮﯾﺾ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺲ ﻭﯾﺮﺍﯾﺶ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ 1ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭﯾﺮﺍﯾﺶ ،ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ. ﻭﯾﮋﮔﯽ ﻫﺎی ﻭﯾﺮﺍﯾﺶ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺰ ﺩﻗﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ) ،720X480 (D1ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﻉ MPEG4ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ. 2ﺗﻌﻮﯾﺾ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. 3ﺑﺨﺸﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ .ﺩﻭﺭ ﮐﻠﯿﻪ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺭﻧﮓ ﯾﺎ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ،ﯾﮏ ﺧﻂ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ. ﻣﺜﻼﹰ ﻣﻮی ﺷﺨﺺ ﯾﺎ ﻟﺒﺎﺱ ﺍﻭ. 4ﯾﮏ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. 5ﺗﺄﯾﯿﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ.
ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﻫﺎی ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺭﻧﮕﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ 1ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭﯾﺮﺍﯾﺶ ،ﻓﯿﻠﺘﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ. 1ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭﯾﺮﺍﯾﺶ ،ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ. 2ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﻫﺮﯾﮏ ﺍﺯ ﻫﯿﺠﺪﻩ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﺯﯾﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. 2ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. 3ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﻃﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﯾﮏ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ،ﮐﺎﻓﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻟﻐﻮ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ. ﺑﺮﺵ ﻋﮑﺲ 1ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭﯾﺮﺍﯾﺶ، ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ. 3ﺑﺨﺸﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ .
ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮﺍﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺭﻭی ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﯾﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﯿﺪ .ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮﺍﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﯾﮏ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯﺁﻭﺭی ﯾﺎ ﯾﮏ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ .ﺍﮔﺮ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ،ﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﯾﮏ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﯿﺪ. ﻟﻐﻮ ﻭﯾﺮﺍﯾﺸﯽ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻪ ﺭﻭی ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﯾﺪ ،ﭘﺎک ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﭼﺮﺧﺶ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﻮﺩ .ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻭﯾﺮﺍﯾﺸﯽ ﭘﯿﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺗﺮی ﻧﯿﺰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ. ﺑﻪ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺭﻧﮕﯽ ﻭ ﺗﻌﻮﯾﺾ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺲ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ 60ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﻫﺎی ﺷﻤﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﺯﻣﯿﻨﻪ 1ﻋﮑﺴﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺴﺘﯿﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﺯﻣﯿﻨﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﻮﺩ. 2ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﻨﻮی ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﻮﺩ. 3ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ. 4ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﺯﻣﯿﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ .ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﯾﺎ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﻭﯾﺮﺍﯾﺶ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﮐﺎﺭﻫﺎی ﻋﺎﻟﯽ ﺑﺴﯿﺎﺭ ﺯﯾﺎﺩی ﻫﺴﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ،ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺷﻮﺭ ﻭ ﺯﻧﺪﮔﯽ ﺑﺒﺨﺸﯿﺪ.
ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﻫﺎی ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ 1ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﭘﯿﺶ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ، ﺩﻫﯿﺪ. ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ 2ﮔﺎﻟﺮی ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ. 3ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﯾﺎ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﻮﺩ. ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﯿﺖ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﯾﯽ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﯾﺎ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﯾﺎ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ ،ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺰﺩﯾﮏ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺘﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻢ ﯾﺎ ﺩﻭﺭ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺁﻥ ﻫﺎ ،ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﯾﺎ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی 3ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﮑﻪ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﯿﺪ ،ﮐﻠﯿﻪ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ ،ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻧﯿﺰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ. ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ 4ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ، ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ -ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ. ﻧﮑﺘﻪ! ﺑﺎ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻫﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ،ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺭﻧﮓ ،ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺳﻔﯿﺪی ﻭ ﮐﯿﻔﯿﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ،ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺭﻭﺷﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎی ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﻫﺎی ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ 1ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺎﺏ، ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ.
) - 640x480 (VGAﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ .VGA ) - 320x240 (QVGAﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﮐﻮﭼﮑﺘﺮ ،ﻭ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﯾﻦ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﮐﻮﭼﮑﺘﺮ .ﺍﯾﻦ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺻﺮﻓﻪ ﺟﻮﯾﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻀﺎی ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﺳﺖ. - 176x144ﮐﻮﭼﮑﺘﺮﯾﻦ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﻭ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﯾﻦ ﮐﻮﭼﮑﺘﺮﯾﻦ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ. 4ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺗﺄﯾﯿﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺎﺏ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺮﺩﯾﺪ. ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﻭﯾﺮﺍﯾﺶ LG GC900 ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺰ )720X480 (D1 ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ .ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﺼﻤﯿﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻭﯾﺮﺍﯾﺶ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﺩﺍﺭﯾﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻧﮑﻨﯿﺪ.
ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ -ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺧﺎﺻﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺗﻌﯿﯿﻦ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ .ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﯾﮏ ،MMSﺍﺯ ﺑﯿﻦ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻋﺎﺩی ﻭ MMSﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﻧﮑﺘﻪ! ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ MMSﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﯿﯿﻦ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ،ﺳﻌﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﯿﻔﯿﺖ ﭘﺎﯾﯿﻦ ﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ ﺗﺮی ﺑﮕﯿﺮﯾﺪ. ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ -ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﯾﺎ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ. ﺻﺪﺍ -ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ ،ﺑﯽ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻭ ﺗﺎﺭﯾﮏ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﯿﯿﻦ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ .ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮی ﮐﻪ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺁﻥ ﮐﻢ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ،ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﺎﺭﯾﮏ ﺗﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺮﺳﺪ، ﺣﺎﻝ ﺁﻧﮑﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮی ﮐﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﺍﺗﺐ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺗﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺭﺳﯿﺪ. 1 ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ. 2ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ،ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺑﻠﻐﺰﺍﻧﯿﺪ ،ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﺗﺎﺭﯾﮏ ﺗﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ ،ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﻮﺭ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﻭ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺗﺮ، ﺑﻠﻐﺰﺍﻧﯿﺪ.
ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺁﺷﻨﺎﯾﯽ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺎﺏ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ -ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ،ﺍﯾﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ. ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺿﺒﻂ ﮔﺎﻟﺮی -ﺍﯾﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮔﺎﻟﺮی ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ. ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ -ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ،ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﭘﯿﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻌﯿﺖ ﻓﻼﺵ -ﻓﻼﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﯾﺎ ﻟﻐﻮ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ -ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ -ﺍﺯ ﺑﯿﻦ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﯾﺎ ﺷﺐ ﯾﮑﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﯾﮏ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﮐﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ .ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﺷﯿﻪ ﭘﺎﯾﯿﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ. ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﻭﯾﺮﺍﯾﺶ LG GC900 ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺰ )720X480 (D1 ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ .ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﺼﻤﯿﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻭﯾﺮﺍﯾﺶ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﺩﺍﺭﯾﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻧﮑﻨﯿﺪ. ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ. ﭘﺨﺶ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺷﻮﺩ.
ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻓﻮﺭی 1ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﯾﺪ. 2ﺳﭙﺲ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﻭﺿﻌﯿﺖ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ. 3ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺎﺏ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ. 4ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﯽ ﮐﻪ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﻓﻘﯽ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﯾﺪ ،ﻟﻨﺰ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﮕﯿﺮﯾﺪ. 5ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺷﻮﺩ. 6ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﯾﯿﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺎﺏ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ .
ﻧﮑﺘﻪ! ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﻋﮑﺴﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺭﻧﮕﯽ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﯿﺎﻩ ﻭﺳﻔﯿﺪ ﯾﺎ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ﻗﻬﻮﻩ ﺍی ﺗﺒﺪﯾﻞ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺍﻣﺎ ﳕﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﻋﮑﺴﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺳﯿﺎﻩ ﻭ ﺳﻔﯿﺪ ﯾﺎ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ﻗﻬﻮﻩ ﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻧﮕﯽ ﺗﺒﺪﯾﻞ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ LG GC900ﯾﮏ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ 640x480ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮی ﻭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺭﻭﺩ. 1ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﻭﺿﻌﯿﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ، ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮی ﭘﯿﺶ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ، ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ -ﺩﻭﻣﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺟﻐﺮﺍﻓﯿﺎﯾﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ -ﺭﻭﺷﻦ/ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻧﮑﺘﻪ! ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﯾﺪ ،ﮐﻠﯿﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺰ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻭ ﮐﯿﻔﯿﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﭘﯿﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺑﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮔﺸﺖ .ﮐﻠﯿﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﻏﯿﺮ ﭘﯿﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﯿﺎﺯ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻭ ISO ﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﻣﺠﺪﺩﺍ ﹰ ﺍﳒﺎﻡ ﮔﯿﺮﺩ .ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺮﻓﱳ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﻌﺪی ﺧﻮﺩ ،ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﻨﺮی -ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ) .ﻋﺎﺩی ،ﮔﺮﻡ ،ﺳﺮﺩ ،ﺳﯿﺎﻩ ﻭ ﺳﻔﯿﺪ(. ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ -ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﯾﺎ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ. ﻋﮑﺲ ﭘﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ -ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﯾﮑﺪﯾﮕﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﺗﺮﮐﯿﺐ ﻭ ﺗﺒﺪﯾﻞ ﺑﻪ ﯾﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﺎ ﺯﺍﻭﯾﻪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﺳﺒﮏ ﭘﯿﺶ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ -ﻧﻮﻉ ﭘﯿﺶ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﯾﺎ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﺍﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ. ISO - ISOﺣﺴﺎﺳﯿﺖ ﺣﺴﮕﺮ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﯿﯿﻦ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ .
ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﭘﯿﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻫﻤﻪ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺯ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺎﺏ، ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﭘﯿﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﻮﺩ. ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺑﺎ ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻣﺪﻭﺭ ،ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ .ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ،ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺗﺄﯾﯿﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ. ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ -ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ LG GC900ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﻭﺿﻌﯿﺖ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ .ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺑﯿﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﻭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﻭﺿﻌﯿﺖ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ.
ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﭘﯿﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺭﻭی ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ،ﺍﻣﺎ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺩﯾﮕﺮی ﻫﻢ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ. ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ 1ﺍﺯ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺎﺏ، ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻨﻮی ﻓﺮﻋﯽ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺷﻮﯾﺪ. 2ﺳﻪ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﻼﺵ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ: ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ -ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﯾﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺧﻮﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺭﺯﯾﺎﺑﯽ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ. ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ -ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ ،ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﯽ ﺯﻧﺪ. ﻫﻤﯿﺸﻪ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ -ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﻫﻤﯿﺸﻪ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﯽ ﺯﻧﺪ. ﻫﻤﯿﺸﻪ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ -ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺍﺻﻼﹰ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺯﻧﺪ .
ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺁﺷﻨﺎﯾﯽ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺎﺏ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ -ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ،ﺍﯾﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ. ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ -ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﯿﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ ﻭ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ. ﮔﺎﻟﺮی -ﺍﯾﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮔﺎﻟﺮی ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ. ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ -ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ،ﺍﯾﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ. ﻣﺎﮐﺮﻭ -ﺍﯾﻦ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﻧﺰﺩﯾﮏ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﻭﺿﻌﯿﺖ ﻓﻼﺵ -ﻓﻼﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﯾﺎ ﻟﻐﻮ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ -ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﺍ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﯿﺪ، ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺮﮔﺮﺩﯾﺪ. ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ .ﺍﯾﻦ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﺑﺎ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ. ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺷﻮﺩ. ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻓﻮﺭﺍ ﹰ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺩﯾﮕﺮی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ .ﻋﮑﺲ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ. ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﮔﺎﻟﺮی ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ. ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ، ﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ ،ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﯾﺎ ﺗﻬﯿﻪ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻭﺑﻼگ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻓﻮﺭی 1ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﯾﺪ. 2ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﯽ ﮐﻪ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﻓﻘﯽ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﯾﺪ ،ﻟﻨﺰ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﮕﯿﺮﯾﺪ. 3ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ .ﯾﮏ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺎﺏ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ. 4ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻃﻮﺭی ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﯾﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺑﺒﯿﻨﯿﺪ. 5ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺳﺒﺰ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ، ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺭﻭی ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ..
ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﻼﯾﺪ -ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺳﻼﯾﺪﻫﺎی ﺷﻤﺎ ﭼﻪ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻤﺎﻧﺪ. ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺗﺤﻮﯾﻞ -ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﭼﻪ ﻣﺪﺕ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻫﺮ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ. ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﭼﻨﺪﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی -ﺟﺰﺋﯿﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺳﺎﯾﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﺯ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ،ﺩﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ: ﭘﺴﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ -ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﭘﺴﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ،ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﯾﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ. ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﺴﺐ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺎ ﺍﭘﺮﺍﺗﻮﺭ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﯿﺮﯾﺪ.
ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ ﺗﺤﻮﯾﻞ -ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﺗﺄﯾﯿﺪ ﺗﺤﻮﯾﻞ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﯾﺎﻓﺖ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﻣﺪﺕ ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ -ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻪ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﻫﺎی ﺷﻤﺎ ﺗﺎ ﭼﻪ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻗﯽ ﺑﻤﺎﻧﻨﺪ. ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ -ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﻫﺎی ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺘﻨﯽ ،ﺻﻮﺗﯽ، ﻧﻤﺎﺑﺮی X.400 ،ﯾﺎ ﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ ﺗﺒﺪﯾﻞ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﺭﻣﺰﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﻧﻮﯾﺴﻪ ﻫﺎ -ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺭﻣﺰﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﻧﻮﯾﺴﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ .ﺍﯾﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺭﻭی ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﯿﺠﻪ ﻫﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺗﺄﺛﯿﺮ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﺩ.
ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻦ -ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﻫﺎی ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﮕﻮﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﮕﻮﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﻫﺎی SMSﻭ MMS ﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻏﺎﻟﺒﺎ ﹰ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﯿﺪ. ﺍﻟﮕﻮﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺁﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻭﯾﺮﺍﯾﺶ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. 1ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ،ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺍﻟﮕﻮﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮی ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. 2ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﺍﻟﮕﻮﻫﺎی ﻣﺘﻦ ﯾﺎ ﺍﻟﮕﻮﻫﺎی ﭼﻨﺪﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ .ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺍﻟﮕﻮﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺰ ﺍﻟﮕﻮﻫﺎی ﭘﯿﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ MMSﺭﺍ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ،ﻭﯾﺮﺍﯾﺶ ﯾﺎ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ .
ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺑﻪ ﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ -ﺍﯾﻦ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺄﯾﯿﺪ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ. ﺩﺭﺧﻮﺍﺳﺖ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ -ﺍﯾﻦ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺄﯾﯿﺪ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺩﺭﺧﻮﺍﺳﺖ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ. ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﺑﺎﺯﯾﺎﺑﯽ -ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻪ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ GC900ﺷﻤﺎ ﻫﺮ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻭﻗﺖ ﯾﮏ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ. ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻭ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ -ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻧﯿﺰ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﮔﻨﺠﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ. ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﭘﯿﻮﺳﺖ -ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﭘﯿﻮﺳﺖ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﭘﺎﺳﺨﯽ ﮔﻨﺠﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ.
ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﯿﺮی -ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﯿﺮی ﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ .ﺍﺯ ﺑﯿﻦ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻓﻘﻂ ﺳﺮﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﯾﺎ ﮐﻞ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﺑﺮﺍی ،POP3ﻓﻘﻂ ﺳﺮﺻﻔﺤﻪ ،ﺳﺮﺻﻔﺤﻪ +ﻣﺘﻦ ،ﯾﺎ ﮐﻞ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﺑﺮﺍی IMAP4ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﯿﺎﺑﯽ -ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﯿﺎﺑﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺍﯾﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﭘﯿﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ -ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺁﯾﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﭘﯿﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﯾﺎ ﺧﯿﺮ. ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﮑﻪ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪ ،ﺩﺭ ﻟﯿﺴﺖ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ.
ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﯿﺖ ﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ ﺩﺭ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ،GC900 ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﻫﻤﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎﺷﯿﺪ .ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻭ ﺳﻬﻮﻟﺖ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ POP3ﻭ IMAP4ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ. ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ 1ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ، ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ،ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. 2ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ .ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ،ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺟﺎﺩﻭﯾﯽ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯی ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﻧﮑﺘﻪ! ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ،ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺟﺎﺩﻭﯾﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ.
ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﯿﺸﮕﻮی T9 ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﺘﻦ ﭘﯿﺸﮕﻮی T9ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ. ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ. ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﯿﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻫﺎی ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻣﺘﻨﯽ ،ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﻭﺿﻌﯿﺖ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ. ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺑﯿﻦ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﻣﺘﻦ )ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﻭ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ( ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﺭﺝ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ، ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ. ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ،T9 ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ GC900ﺗﺮﮐﯿﺒﯽ ﺍﺯ SMSﻭ MMSﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﯾﮏ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻓﻬﻢ ﮔﻨﺠﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ. 4ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﯾﮏ ﺍﻟﮕﻮی ﻣﺘﻦ ،ﺍﻟﮕﻮی ﭼﻨﺪﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی ،ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﺣﺴﺎﺳﯽ ،ﻧﺎﻡ ﻭ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ،ﺍﺳﻼﯾﺪ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ،ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﯾﺎ ﺍﻣﻀﺎ، ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ. ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩ ﻭ ﯾﺎ 1ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ، ﺳﭙﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ،ﺩﺭ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﭘﯿﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﻧﮑﺘﻪ! ﺑﻪ ﺍﺯﺍی ﻫﺮ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﻣﺘﻨﯽ ﻧﻮﯾﺴﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻫﺮ ﺷﺨﺺ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ، ﻫﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﺍی ﺍﺯ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺭﯾﺎﻓﺖ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ.
ﺑﺎﻗﯽ ﻣﯽ ﻣﺎﻧﺪ .ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﯾﻦ ﺍﮔﺮ ﯾﮏ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ،ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺳﻴﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﭘﺎک ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ. ﭘﺎک ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﯿﻦ -ﻫﻤﻪ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﯿﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ .ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﻫﺴﺘﯿﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﯿﺪ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﯿﻦ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺎک ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ،ﺑﻠﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ. ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﯿﻦ ﺑﻮﺳﯿﻠﻪ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﯿﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻮﺳﯿﻠﻪ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺑﻪﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ. ﺗﻬﯿﻪ ﭘﺸﺘﯿﺒﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﯿﻦ -ﺑﻪ ﺗﻬﯿﻪ ﭘﺸﺘﯿﺒﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺯﯾﺎﺑﯽ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ 82ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﯿﻦ 8ﻫﻤﭽﻨﯿﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﯾﮏ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﺯﻧﮓ ،ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ،ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﻣﻨﺰﻝ ،ﻧﺎﻡ ﺷﺮﮐﺖ ،ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﮐﺎﺭ ،ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﺷﺮﮐﺖ ،ﺭﻭﺯ ﺗﻮﻟﺪ ،ﺳﺎﻟﮕﺮﺩ ﻭ ﯾﮏ ﯾﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﯿﺪ. 9ﺑﺮﺍی ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺐ، ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ. ﻧﮑﺘﻪ! ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﯿﻦ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ،ﺑﻪ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﯾﮏ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﯾﮏ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺍﺯ 1ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ، ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ،ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﯿﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. 2ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﯿﻦ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮی ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺐ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺐ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﺩﻭ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮی ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺐ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ: ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ 1ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ، ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺐ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ. ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ 1ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ، ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﯿﻦ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﻮﺩ. ﻧﺎﻡ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. 2ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺐ ﺩﺭ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﯾﺎ ﺳﻴﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ. ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ 2ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮی ﯾﺎ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﻭ ﯾﺎ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﯽ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺷﻮﺩ.
ﲤﺎﺱ ﻫﺎ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﻋﺎﺩی ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ، 1 ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. 2ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﻋﺎﺩی ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ .ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﯾﻦ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺯﯾﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ: ﺭﺩ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ -ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻟﯿﺴﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻫﺎی ﺭﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﺟﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ. ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ﻭ ﻫﻤﻪ ی ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻫﺎ ،ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﯿﻦ ﯾﺎ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻭﯾﮋﻩ ،ﯾﺎ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺛﺒﺖ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ )ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﯿﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻧﯿﺴﺖ( ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ .ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ،ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ.
ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﯾﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ، 1 ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ، 1 ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. 2ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ،ﻭ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﻭ/ﯾﺎ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. 2ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﯾﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ،ﻭ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﻭ/ﯾﺎ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. 3ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺸﻐﻮﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ ،ﺑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﯾﺎ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﻧﯿﺴﺘﯿﺪ ،ﻫﻤﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ.
ﲤﺎﺱ ﻫﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ DTMF DTMFﺍﯾﻦ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺷﻤﺎ ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﻫﺎی ﻋﺪﺩی ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﯿﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻫﺎی ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ DTMF .ﭘﯿﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺭﻭی ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ. ﺑﺮﺍی ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺣﯿﻦ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ) ﻣﺜﻼﹰ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﯾﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﯾﮏ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ(، ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻏﯿﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ DTMFﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﻓﻘﻂ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ -ﻟﯿﺴﺘﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﮐﻪ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺘﻨﯽ ﻭ ﭼﻨﺪﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی ﺩﺭﯾﺎﻓﺖ ﯾﺎ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﻓﻘﻂ -VTﻟﯿﺴﺘﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮی ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ،ﺍﺯ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻭ ﭘﺎﯾﯿﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ی ﺳﺮﯾﻊ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﯾﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺐ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ .ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻧﯿﺎﺯی ﺑﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﻧﯿﺴﺖ. ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﯿﺮی ﺳﺮﯾﻊ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭی ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﮑﺮﺭﺍ ﹰ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻭ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻣﯽ ﮔﯿﺮﯾﺪ ﯾﮏ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﯿﺮی ﺳﺮﯾﻊ ﺗﺨﺼﯿﺺ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ. ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ 1ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺍﻭﻟﯿﻪ، ﻭ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
ﲤﺎﺱ ﻫﺎ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺣﯿﻦ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ -ﺍﺯ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻨﻮی ”ﺣﯿﻦ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ“ ،ﺍﺯ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﯾﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺮﻭ ﺑﻪ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﻫﺎ ﯾﮑﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﯿﻦ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﻫﺎی ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﯿﻦ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ .ﻫﻤﭽﻨﯿﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ،ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﭘﺎﯾﺎﻥ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ، ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺎﯾﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ. ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ - ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﯿﺮﺩ. ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﯿﮑﺮﻭﻓﻦ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻭ ﺻﺤﺒﺖ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺑﯽ ﺻﺪﺍ - ﻧﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺸﻨﻮﺩ.
ﲤﺎﺱ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭی ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﯾﺎ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ 1 ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﻮﺩ. 2ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ .ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺬﻑ ﯾﮏ ﺭﻗﻢ ،ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﭘﺎک ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ. 3ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﺷﻮﺩ. 4ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﺎﯾﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ،ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ. ﺭﺍ ﻧﮑﺘﻪ! ﺑﺮﺍی ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ +ﺟﻬﺖ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭی ﲤﺎﺱ ﻫﺎی ﺑﯿﻦ ﺍﳌﻠﻠﯽ ،ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ﯾﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﯾﺪ.
ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻭﻇﺎﯾﻒ ﭼﻨﺪﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻭﻇﺎﯾﻒ ﭼﻨﺪﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﯾﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﻨﻮی ﻭﻇﺎﯾﻒ ﭼﻨﺪﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﻮﺩ .ﺍﺯ ﺍﯾﻨﺠﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩی ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﯾﮏ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﭘﯿﺪﺍ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﻧﮑﺘﻪ! ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻭﻇﺎﯾﻒ ﭼﻨﺪﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺮﺍ ﹰ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﻣﮑﻌﺐ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ ﺩﺭﯾﺎﻓﺖ ﺷﺪ MMS MMSﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺯﯾﺎﺑﯽ MMS SMSﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﭘﺴﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻧﺸﺪ ﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺮﻭﺍﺯ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﺑﻴﺼﺪﺍ - ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ 1-10 ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ ﻭﺿﻌﯿﺖ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﺗﻠﻮﯾﺰﯾﻮﻥ/ﭘﺮﻭژﮐﺘﻮﺭ 23
ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻭﺿﻌﯿﺖ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻭﺿﻌﯿﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎی ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺷﺮﺍﯾﻄﯽ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﺳﯿﮕﻨﺎﻝ ،ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﻫﺎی ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﻭ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﯿﻦ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﯾﺎ ﻏﯿﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﯾﺎ GPRSﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ. ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻻ ﹰ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻭﺿﻌﯿﺖ ﻣﯽ ﺑﯿﻨﯿﺪ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ. ﻧﻤﺎﺩ 22 ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺷﺮﺡ ﻣﻮﺳﯿﻘﯽ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺩﺭﺣﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﯿﺮی ﺑﺎﺭﮔﯿﺮی ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﺪ. ﺑﺎﺭﮔﯿﺮی ﻟﻐﻮ ﺷﺪ.
ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﯾﯽ ﯾﺎ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﯽ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ،ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻭﺏ ،ﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ ﻫﺎ ﯾﺎ ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﯾﺎ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ .ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺘﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻢ ﻧﺰﺩﯾﮏ ﯾﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻢ ﺩﻭﺭ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ ﭘﯿﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ GC900 ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭی ﮐﻪ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ. ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺍﺯ ﯾﮏ ﺟﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎی ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﮑﺸﯿﺪ .ﺩﺭ ﺑﻌﻀﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻭﺏ، ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﯾﺎ ﭘﺎﯾﯿﻦ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻫﺮ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﮔﯽ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ.
3ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﯾﺎ ﻣﻮﺳﯿﻘﯽ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. 4ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﯾﺎ ﺻﺪﺍﯾﯽ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﯾﺪ ،ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﯾﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ. 1ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ. 2ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﻣﻮﺳﯿﻘﯽ ﯾﺎ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ،ﻣﻨﻮی ﻣﻮﺳﯿﻘﯽ ﯾﺎ ﮔﺎﻟﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﮐﻠﯿﺪﻫﺎی ﺳﺮﯾﻊ ﮐﻠﯿﺪﻫﺎی ﺳﺮﯾﻊ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ،ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﯾﮏ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﯿﺶ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ،ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ.
ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ 3ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺐ 4ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﭼﻨﺪﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی • ﺑﺎ GC900ﺩﺭ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎﺷﯿﺪ -ﺭﺍﺑﻂ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺑﺮ ﭘﺎﯾﻪ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ .ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ،ﮐﺎﻓﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﭼﭗ ﯾﺎ ﺍﺯ ﭼﭗ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﭘﺎک ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. • ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ -ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺖ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ، ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﯾﺎ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ،ﯾﺎ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩی ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ،ﯾﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﯾﺪ.
ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻪ ﮐﻠﯿﻪ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻨﻮ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﭘﯿﺪﺍ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ،ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻭ ﻭﺿﻌﯿﺖ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺴﯿﺎﺭی ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ. ﻧﮑﺎﺗﯽ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻧﯿﺰ ﺟﺎی ﺑﺴﯿﺎﺭی ﺧﻮﺑﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺁﺷﻨﺎﯾﯽ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ. • ﻫﺮ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮐﻪ GC900ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ،ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺑﺮ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ.
ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﻮﺩ .ﺍﺯ ﺍﯾﻨﺠﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺑﯿﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎ ،ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎی ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮی ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﭘﯿﺪﺍ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ :ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ،ﭼﻨﺪﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی ،ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ.
ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﯿﻦ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ ﹰ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ. ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ،ﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ،ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﯿﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ: ﺗﻮﺟﻪ :ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ،ﻫﻤﻪ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ. ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ، 1ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ، ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. 2ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻣﺪﯾﺮ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻧﺼﺐ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﯾﺶ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ. GC900ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻇﺮﻓﯿﺖ ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ 32ﮔﯿﮕﺎﺑﺎﯾﺖ ﭘﺸﺘﯿﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ. ﻧﮑﺘﻪ :ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﯾﮏ ﻭﺳﯿﻠﻪ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺍﺧﺘﯿﺎﺭی ﺍﺳﺖ. ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺷﮑﺎﻑ ﺑﺎﻻی ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺻﺪﺍی ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺟﺎ ﺑﯿﺎﻓﺘﺪ .ﺩﻗﺖ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻃﻼﯾﯽ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺭﻭ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﯾﯿﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ. ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﮐﺎﻣﻼﹰ ﺩﺭ ﺷﮑﺎﻑ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ،ﺩﺭ ﻏﯿﺮ ﺍﯾﻨﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺁﺳﯿﺐ ﻣﯽ ﺑﯿﻨﺪ.
ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ 1ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﮑﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻭﻟﯿﻦ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﺯ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ،ﺍﻃﻤﯿﻨﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﯿﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ. 2ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻓﻠﺶ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺳﺖ )ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﻃﻮﺭ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ( ﻓﯿﺶ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻮﮐﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﮐﻨﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺗﻌﺒﯿﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻭ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﮐﺎﻣﻼﹰ ﺟﺎ ﯾﺒﺎﻓﺘﺪ. 3ﺳﺮ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺮﯾﺰ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺑﺰﻧﯿﺪ .ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﺳﺎﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﯿﺪ. 4ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﭘﯿﺸﺮﻓﺖ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ.
ﻧﺼﺐ ﺳﻴﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی 4ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﻟﺒﻪ ﺑﺎﻻی ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻟﺒﻪ ﺑﺎﻻی ﻣﺤﻔﻈﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ .ﺩﻗﺖ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺳﻄﻮﺡ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﻭی ﭘﺎﯾﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎی ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ .ﻟﺒﻪ ﭘﺎﯾﯿﻦ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﯾﯿﻦ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺟﺎ ﺑﯿﺎﻓﺘﺪ.
ﻧﺼﺐ ﺳﻴﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی 1ﺩﺭﺏ ﻣﺤﻔﻈﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﯾﺪ 3ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺎ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ. ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻔﻈﻪ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻠﻐﺰﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺟﺎ ﺑﯿﺎﻓﺘﺪ. ﺩﻗﺖ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻧﺎﺣﯿﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻃﻼﯾﯽ ﺭﻧﮓ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﻭ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﯾﯿﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ .ﺑﺮﺍی ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ،ﺑﺎ ﻣﻼﯾﻤﺖ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺑﯿﺮﻭﻥ ﺑﮑﺸﯿﺪ. 2ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ :ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﮑﻨﯿﺪ ،ﺍﯾﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺁﺳﯿﺐ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ.
ﳕﺎی ﺑﺎﺯ ﺭﻭﮐﺶ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺳﻮﮐﺖ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺳﻴﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ LED ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻟﻨﺰ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﻧﮑﺘﻪ! ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ ،ﺑﺎ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﱳ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺑﺎﻻی ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ ،ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ .ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺑﺎﻻی ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺷﻮﺩ .ﺍﯾﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ.
ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ،ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ )ﮐﺎﺑﻞ (USB ﻧﮑﺘﻪ :ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ،USBﺻﺒﺮ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺛﺒﺖ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ. ﮐﻠﯿﺪﻫﺎی ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺻﺪﺍ • ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻏﯿﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ :ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ. • ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ :ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍی ﮔﻮﺷﯽ. • ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﭘﺨﺶ ﯾﮏ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ :ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﭘﯿﻮﺳﺘﻪ. ﺳﻮﮐﺖ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻭﻇﺎﯾﻒ ﭼﻨﺪﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ • ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﯿﻢ ﺑﻪ ﭘﯿﺶ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ،ﺍﯾﻦ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺕ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ.
ﺁﺷﻨﺎﯾﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ/ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﻭﺷﻦ/ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ،ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺕ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ ) 3ﺛﺎﻧﯿﻪ( ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ. ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺣﺴﮕﺮ ﻧﺰﺩﯾﮑﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﭘﺎﯾﺎﻥ • ﯾﮑﺒﺎﺭ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﺮﮔﺮﺩﺩ. ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ :ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﯾﮏ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺳﻨﮕﯿﻦ ﺭﻭی ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﯾﺎ ﻧﺸﺴﱳ ﺭﻭی ﺁﻥ ،ﳑﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺁﺳﯿﺐ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ LCDﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﳌﺴﯽ ﺁﻥ ﺷﻮﺩ .ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﺣﺴﮕﺮ ﻧﺰﺩﯾﮑﯽ LCDﻧﭙﻮﺷﺎﻧﯿﺪ .ﳑﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺣﺴﮕﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ.
ﻣﺒﺪﻝ 85.................................................DivX ﻭﺏ ﻣﺮﻭﺭﮔﺮ86.................................................................... ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ86............................................. ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻞ ﯾﺎﺏ ﻫﺎ86.................... ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ RSSﺧﻮﺍﻥ87.......................................... ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ 87...................... ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺗﺎﺭﯾﺨﭽﻪ ﻣﺮﻭﺭﮔﺮ87.................................. ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﻭﺭﮔﺮ ﻭﺏ88.........................
ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎ69.................................................................... ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺻﺪﺍ 69.................................................... ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ 69................................................................ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﮐﻠﯿﭗ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮی 70.......................................... ﺑﺎﺯی ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ 70.............................................. ﺍﳒﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺯی70........................................................ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮی ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ 70...................
ﺧﻼﻓﻴﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ42......................................................................... ﮔﺮﻓﱳ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻓﻮﺭی 42.............................................. ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﺍ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﯿﺪ43........................................، ﺁﺷﻨﺎﯾﯽ ﺑﺎ ﳕﺎﯾﺎﺏ44.................................................... ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻼﺵ45................................................... ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ45...................................................... ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﭘﯿﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ 46..........................
ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻭ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯی ﺁﺷﻨﺎﯾﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ8................................................. ﳕﺎی ﺑﺎﺯ10........................................................................ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺳﻴﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی11......................................... ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ13.................................................... ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ 14............................................................ ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﻣﻨﻮ16.................................................................
ﺣﺴﻦ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻭ ﺧﺮﯾﺪ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﭘﯿﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﮐﻢ ﺣﺠﻢ GC900ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺗﺒﺮﯾﮏ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻮﯾﯿﻢ .ﺍﯾﻦ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺪﯾﺪﺗﺮﯾﻦ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻻﺕ ﺷﺮﮐﺖ LGﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ ﺁﺧﺮﯾﻦ ﻓﻦ ﺁﻭﺭی ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺳﯿﺎﺭ ﺩﯾﺠﯿﺘﺎﻝ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ.
ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﯾﺎﺕ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﯾﺎ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﺍﺗﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ ،ﺑﺎ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ. ﺍﯾﻦ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺎﻃﺮ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻧﺎﺑﯿﻨﺎ ﺗﻮﺻﯿﻪ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ.
